{ "count": 1268, "faqs": [ { "question": "Do you deliver across the UK?", "answer": "Yes. We deliver to every county, including rural and remote addresses. Delivery is free on orders of £100 or more and a flat £12 under that.", "source": "general", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/contact/" }, { "question": "How long does delivery take?", "answer": "We dispatch within 2 working days and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. You get a tracking link by email as soon as your order is on its way.", "source": "general", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/contact/" }, { "question": "What payment methods can I use?", "answer": "Visa, Mastercard and American Express through our secure Stripe checkout, or PayPal. Prices are in pounds sterling.", "source": "general", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/contact/" }, { "question": "Is the material really cashmere, linen or leather?", "answer": "Every product page names the material and, where the maker states it, the percentage. We list what the maker confirms and nothing more. If a piece is a blend, a linen look or faux leather, its name says so. If a fact is missing from the page, email us before you order and we'll check it.", "source": "general", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/contact/" }, { "question": "How do I care for cashmere, merino and linen?", "answer": "Cashmere and merino: hand wash cold or dry clean, dry flat, store folded. Linen: machine wash cool, line dry or tumble low, and skip the iron if you like the softer look. Each product page has the care instructions for that item.", "source": "general", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/contact/" }, { "question": "Can I return something if it isn't right?", "answer": "Yes. You can return any product within 14 days of delivery, unused and in resaleable condition, for a full refund including standard delivery. This is on top of your rights under the Consumer Rights Act 2015.", "source": "general", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/contact/" }, { "question": "Do the colours match the photos?", "answer": "As closely as a screen allows. Natural fibres and leather vary a little from piece to piece, and marble veining is never the same twice. Small differences from the photo are normal and not a fault.", "source": "general", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/contact/" }, { "question": "Do you gift wrap?", "answer": "Not at the moment. Orders ship in plain protective packaging with no prices shown on the outside, so you can send an order straight to the person it's for.", "source": "general", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/contact/" }, { "question": "What is this product?", "answer": "It is an adult beanie hat knitted from 100% cashmere in a three ply construction. It is made in Scotland. The hat is green, unisex and supplied in one adult size.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "What does 3 ply actually mean?", "answer": "Ply counts how many individual strands of yarn are twisted together before knitting. Three ply means three strands, so each stitch holds roughly three times the fibre of a single ply knit. That density is what makes the hat warmer.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Is it really 100% cashmere?", "answer": "Yes, the maker states the hat is 100% cashmere. No other fibre is named in the composition.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Where is it made?", "answer": "It is made in Scotland, as stated by the maker. Scotland has a long history of cashmere knitting, and many buyers look for that origin on purpose.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "What size is it?", "answer": "It comes in one adult size described as unisex. Cashmere knit has natural stretch, so a single size suits a broad range of head sizes.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Will it fit a larger head?", "answer": "The knit stretches, which is why one size covers most adults. If you usually need an extra-large hat, the fit will be snugger than average but should still sit properly.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for men and women?", "answer": "Yes, the maker describes it as a unisex adult hat. The shape and single size are designed to work for both. That also makes it one of the easier gifts to buy when you do not know someone's sizing.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "This hat is green. The photographs show a deep, dark green in a ribbed knit with a turn-up cuff. Screens vary, so expect the shade to look a little different in daylight.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "How warm is it compared with a normal wool beanie?", "answer": "Three ply cashmere makes a denser knit than a thin single ply one, and a denser knit tends to feel warmer. Cashmere is also light for its warmth. We have no test figures for this hat.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Will it itch?", "answer": "Cashmere fibres are much finer than coarse sheep's wool, which is the usual cause of itch. Many people who find standard wool hats scratchy find cashmere more comfortable. If your skin is sensitive, hold it against the inside of your wrist first.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Can I wear it under a hood or helmet?", "answer": "It sits close enough to the head to wear under a coat hood with no trouble. Under a cycling or ski helmet it depends on how much room your helmet has, since three ply knit is thicker than a thin liner. Try the combination before relying on it.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Is it windproof?", "answer": "It is a knitted fabric, not a sealed shell, so very strong wind will cut through to some degree. The three ply density helps considerably compared with a loose single ply knit. Pulling a hood over the top handles the worst conditions.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Is it waterproof?", "answer": "No. Cashmere is not a waterproof material. In rain, wear a hood over the hat and dry the beanie flat afterwards.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Does it have a turn-up cuff?", "answer": "Yes. The photographs show a ribbed knit with a turn-up cuff around the brim. The cuff puts a double layer of cashmere over the ears and forehead, which is where a hat needs to work hardest.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Is it for adults or children?", "answer": "The maker gives the age range as adult and sells the hat in one size. It is not sized for children.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "How should I wash it?", "answer": "Hand wash or dry clean only. For hand washing, use cool water and a detergent made for wool or delicates, and move the hat gently rather than scrubbing. Never put it in a machine or tumble dryer.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "How do I dry it after washing?", "answer": "Press the water out between your palms or inside a clean towel, never wring it. Reshape the hat while it is damp and lay it flat to dry. Keep it away from radiators, direct sun and any other direct heat.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "What about bobbling?", "answer": "Small bobbles are normal on cashmere, especially where the hat rubs against a collar or scarf. Remove them with a cashmere comb or a fabric shaver, working gently across the surface. The knit usually settles down after the first season.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "How should I store it in summer?", "answer": "Wash or clean it first, since moths are drawn to body oils rather than clean fibre. Fold it flat and store it in a breathable bag or a drawer with cedar or lavender. Avoid hanging it, which stretches the knit.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Can I iron it?", "answer": "Avoid direct ironing. If the knit needs smoothing, hold a steamer a short distance away or hang the hat in a steamy bathroom briefly, then reshape it flat. Heat pressed straight onto cashmere flattens the loft that keeps you warm.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "How long will it last?", "answer": "How long it lasts depends on care. A three ply knit has more fibre in every stitch than a single ply one. Hand washing and flat drying do most of the work.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Is this a good gift?", "answer": "It is one of the easier gifts to choose because the single unisex size removes the sizing problem. Cashmere also reads as a considered present. It pairs naturally with other cashmere and merino accessories such as a scarf or gloves.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "What grade of cashmere is used?", "answer": "No grade is given in our product record. The composition is 100% cashmere, knitted in a 3 ply yarn.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "How does it compare with a merino beanie?", "answer": "Merino usually costs less. Cashmere is finer and softer against the skin. If softness matters most to you, cashmere is the one to pick.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Can I wear it indoors?", "answer": "Yes, plenty of people wear a cashmere hat indoors in cold houses because it is light and does not feel bulky. Three ply is warm enough that you may find it too much in a heated room. It packs down small when you take it off.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Does it work for travel?", "answer": "Cashmere is light and compresses well, so it takes up little room in a bag. It is a practical choice for cold weather trips and long flights. Fold rather than roll it tightly to keep the shape.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Is it machine washable on a wool cycle?", "answer": "The stated care is hand wash or dry clean only, so follow that rather than risking a machine cycle. Even a gentle wool programme agitates more than hand washing. Dry cleaning is the safest route if you would rather not wash it yourself.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "Is the knit thick or thin?", "answer": "It is a 3 ply knit, so it is thicker than a single ply cashmere hat. The photographs show a defined rib with a folded cuff. It still feels light on the head because cashmere is a light fibre.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "What does the green go with?", "answer": "A dark green sits easily with navy, grey, camel and black coats. It is a quiet colour, so it works for the commute as well as the weekend. It also pairs well with a plain scarf in a neutral shade.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me?", "answer": "If the fit or the look is not what you hoped for, contact our support team and we will talk you through the returns process for your country. Keep the hat unworn and in its original packaging while you decide. We would rather help you swap it for something that suits than leave you with a hat you never wear.", "source": "3 Ply Cashmere Beanie, Made in Scotland", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cashmere-beanie-3-ply-scotland/" }, { "question": "What is this product?", "answer": "It is a knitted cashmere pashmina scarf for women, made from 100% cashmere as stated by the maker. It can be worn as a neck scarf, a stole or a shoulder wrap. The colour is lavender.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Is it really 100% cashmere?", "answer": "The maker states the fibre content as 100% cashmere. No wool or synthetic fibre is named in the composition. We publish the fibre content exactly as the maker gives it.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "What does knitted mean compared with woven?", "answer": "A knitted fabric is made of interlocking loops, while a woven one is made of threads crossing at right angles. Knitted pashminas have more stretch and drape softly around the neck. Woven ones tend to sit flatter and feel more formal.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "Lavender. It reads as a soft, muted purple that leans slightly grey in low light, which is why it pairs easily with black, navy, camel and denim.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "What shape is the scarf?", "answer": "It is a long, wide rectangle. The maker describes it as a pashmina shawl or stole, and the photographs show it covering the shoulders as well as the neck.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Does it have a fringe?", "answer": "No. The photographs show ribbed knitted ends in place of tassels or a fringe. The long edges are finished with a narrow rolled border.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Is it warm enough for winter?", "answer": "Cashmere is known for its warmth relative to its weight. For most cool and cold days it works well on its own around the neck, and it can also go over a coat as an extra layer.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Will it feel itchy?", "answer": "Cashmere fibres are much finer than standard sheep wool, so most people find cashmere softer against bare skin. Everyone's skin is different, so comfort is personal.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Can I machine wash it?", "answer": "Yes. The maker gives the care instruction as machine wash. We suggest a gentle or wool cycle with cool water and a detergent designed for wool and delicates, and no bleach or fabric softener.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "How should I dry it?", "answer": "Dry it flat, never hanging. Gently press out excess water between towels, reshape the scarf to its natural outline and leave it on a flat surface away from radiators and direct sun.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry it?", "answer": "Tumble drying is not advised for cashmere. Heat and tumbling cause the fibres to shrink and felt. Flat drying takes longer but is far kinder to the knit.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Does cashmere pill?", "answer": "All cashmere pills a little, especially in areas that rub, like where the scarf sits against a coat collar. This is normal for the fibre and not a fault. A cashmere comb or a fabric shaver removes pills easily and the surface looks fresh again.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "How do I store it?", "answer": "Fold it and keep it flat in a drawer or on a shelf. Hanging stretches knitted cashmere over time. For summer storage, use a breathable bag and add a cedar block or lavender sachet to deter moths.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Will moths get to it?", "answer": "Natural fibres can attract moths if stored dirty or in an open drawer for long periods. Wash the scarf before putting it away for the season and store it in a closed, breathable bag with a natural moth deterrent.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Can I iron it?", "answer": "If needed, use a cool iron with a pressing cloth between the iron and the fabric, or hold a steamer slightly away from the surface. Most creases drop out on their own once the scarf is worn or hung in a steamy bathroom briefly.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Is this suitable as a gift?", "answer": "It works well as a gift. Cashmere is an easy choice because it suits almost any wardrobe, and the lavender shade is soft enough to avoid clashing with what someone already owns. A cashmere gift for her is a reliable pick for birthdays, Christmas and anniversaries.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Can I wear it indoors?", "answer": "Yes. A lot of people use a knitted cashmere stole around the house, in draughty offices and on flights. It is warm enough to replace a cardigan and light enough that you do not overheat.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Does it work for evening wear?", "answer": "It does. Drape it over the shoulders of a dress and let the ends fall at the front, or pin it loosely at one shoulder. A cashmere wrap for evening wear covers bare arms without hiding the outfit underneath.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Is it good for travel?", "answer": "Cashmere travels well because it folds down small and recovers from creasing quickly. It doubles as a blanket on a plane or train, which is why many people keep a cashmere travel wrap in a carry-on.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Can men wear it?", "answer": "The maker sells it as a women's piece, and the lavender colour is pitched that way. There is nothing structurally gendered about a knitted scarf, so wear it however you like.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "How is it different from a viscose or acrylic pashmina?", "answer": "Price and feel both differ. Cashmere feels softer and lighter against the neck. Synthetic pashminas are cheaper but tend to feel slippery.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Where is it made?", "answer": "The maker gives the country of origin as China. China is one of the largest producers of cashmere in the world, alongside Mongolia.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Is the knit plain or patterned?", "answer": "Plain. The photographs show a fine, flat knit in a single lavender shade, with a soft heathered look up close. There is no pattern, logo or contrast trim.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "How do I wear it as a shoulder wrap?", "answer": "Open it out flat, lay it across the back of your shoulders and bring both ends forward. For more hold, throw one end over the opposite shoulder, as shown in the main photograph.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "Will the colour fade?", "answer": "Washing cool, keeping it out of strong sunlight and skipping bleach all help the lavender hold its tone. Dry it flat in the shade.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "How often should I wash it?", "answer": "Less often than you might think. A scarf worn over clothes does not need washing after every wear. Airing it overnight is usually enough, with a proper wash every several wears or whenever it is actually soiled.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "What if it shrinks?", "answer": "Shrinkage in cashmere comes from heat and agitation. Stick to cool water, a gentle cycle and flat drying and shrinking is unlikely. If a knit tightens slightly, gently stretch it back into shape while damp.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "What do the ends look like?", "answer": "Each short end is finished in a ribbed knit, like the cuff of a jumper. The ribbing gives the ends a little weight so the scarf hangs straight.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "How do I know if a cashmere scarf is good quality?", "answer": "Feel for softness that goes beyond the surface, check the knit for even tension, and look at how the fabric recovers after you scrunch it in your hand. Good cashmere springs back rather than staying crumpled.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me?", "answer": "If the scarf is not what you hoped for, return it unworn and in its original condition under the returns policy shown on this site. Get in touch with our team first and we will talk you through the steps. We would rather sort it out than have a wrap sitting unused in a drawer.", "source": "Knitted Cashmere Pashmina Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/knitted-cashmere-pashmina-scarf/" }, { "question": "What is this scarf made from?", "answer": "It is made from 100% lambswool, as stated by the maker. Lambswool is the wool from a sheep's first shearing, so the fibres are finer and softer than standard wool. That is why it feels gentle against the neck.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "How long is the scarf?", "answer": "The maker gives two measurements, 174 x 28 cm for the scarf size and 164 x 30 cm in the product dimensions. Expect a length of roughly 164 to 174 cm and a width of 28 to 30 cm. Either way it is long enough to loop twice around the neck or hang flat.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Is it for men or women?", "answer": "Both. The maker sells it as unisex, and the cut and pattern are not gendered. That makes it an easy choice if you are shopping for someone and do not know their sizing.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Will it feel itchy?", "answer": "Lambswool is finer than regular sheep's wool, which is the main reason it is used for scarves worn against the skin. How wool feels varies from person to person. If your skin is sensitive to wool, wear it over a shirt collar.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "It is Black Watch tartan. That is a dark check of navy blue and deep green crossed with black. The photographs show the same pattern on the scarf and its fringe.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Where is it made?", "answer": "The maker gives the country of origin as the United Kingdom. Britain has a long history of weaving tartan cloth.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "How warm is it?", "answer": "Wool traps air between its fibres, and that trapped air is what keeps you warm. A lambswool scarf of this width covers the neck and upper chest, which are the areas that lose heat fastest. It is warm enough for a cold commute but not so bulky that you overheat indoors.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Can I wear it indoors?", "answer": "You can, though most people unwrap it once they are inside. A loose drape indoors rarely feels stifling. If you run warm, hang it up with your coat.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "How do I wash it?", "answer": "Hand wash only, in cool water with a detergent made for wool. Do not wring it out. Press the water out gently, reshape the scarf, and lay it flat to dry.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Can I put it in the washing machine?", "answer": "No. The care instruction is hand wash only, and machine agitation will cause wool to felt and shrink. Even a wool cycle carries risk with a loosely woven scarf. Stick to hand washing.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry it?", "answer": "No. Heat and tumbling will shrink and felt lambswool. Dry it flat on a towel, away from radiators and direct sun.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "How often should it be washed?", "answer": "Far less often than you might think. Airing the scarf overnight between wears is usually enough. Wash it at the end of the season or if it picks up a stain.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Can it be dry cleaned?", "answer": "The stated care instruction is hand wash only. If you would rather not wash it yourself, ask a cleaner who handles knitwear and show them the care label before they treat it.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Will it shrink?", "answer": "Wool shrinks when it meets heat, agitation and sudden temperature changes together. Cool water, gentle handling and flat drying avoid all three, which is why the care instruction is hand wash only.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "How should I store it in summer?", "answer": "Fold it rather than hang it, as hanging stretches the weave over time. Keep it in a drawer or box with a cedar block or lavender sachet to discourage moths. Make sure it is clean before storing, since moths are drawn to traces of skin oil.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "What coats does it go with?", "answer": "Black Watch is dark, so it sits well on navy, grey, black, camel and olive coats. It also works with a denim or waxed jacket for a more casual look. Avoid pairing it with another strong pattern.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Can I wear it with a suit?", "answer": "Yes. A tartan wool scarf is a traditional partner to tailoring and reads as smart rather than casual. Drape it flat under the coat lapels rather than knotting it tightly for the sharpest look.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "What is the best way to tie it?", "answer": "The simplest is the loop knot. Fold the scarf in half lengthways, drape it around your neck, then pull the two tails through the folded loop. At over 160 cm you can also wrap it twice and tuck the ends in for more coverage.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Is this a good gift?", "answer": "It is one of the safer gifts you can buy, because there is no sizing involved. A unisex tartan scarf suits a wide range of ages and styles, which makes it a reliable gift scarf for him or her.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "What is Black Watch tartan?", "answer": "Black Watch is a dark Scottish tartan of navy blue, deep green and black. It is one of the most widely worn tartans, largely because the dark colours sit easily against most coats.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Does it have fringed ends?", "answer": "Yes. The photographs show a fringe at both short ends, in the same navy and green yarns as the tartan.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Is the pattern the same on both sides?", "answer": "A woven tartan carries its check through the cloth, so the pattern shows on both faces. One side can look slightly softer in tone than the other.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "What is the difference between lambswool and merino?", "answer": "Lambswool comes from a sheep's first shearing and is prized for softness and loft. Merino refers to a specific sheep breed with very fine fibres. Both are soft, but lambswool tends to feel fuller and warmer for its weight.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Is lambswool better than acrylic?", "answer": "Wool is a natural fibre and acrylic is a synthetic one. Acrylic is usually cheaper, and many people prefer the feel of wool. Which is better depends on what you want from a scarf.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Will it pill?", "answer": "All wool can pill slightly where it rubs against a coat collar or bag strap. A gentle pass with a fabric comb or pilling stone takes the pills off.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Can children wear it?", "answer": "An adult-length scarf is long on a child, and loose ends can be a safety issue around younger children. For older children who can manage it, fold it short and keep the tails tucked into a coat.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for very cold climates?", "answer": "It gives good coverage for the neck and chest and works well as part of a layered outfit. For deep winter conditions, wear it with a coat that has a high collar so the scarf sits inside rather than over the top.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "How does it compare to a cashmere scarf?", "answer": "Cashmere is finer and lighter for the same warmth, and it costs considerably more. Lambswool is a hardier fibre, which suits daily wear and outdoor use. Many people keep one of each for different occasions.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "Is it woven or knitted?", "answer": "Woven. That gives a flat, fine cloth that sits neatly under a coat collar, not a chunky knit.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me?", "answer": "If the scarf does not suit your coat or is not what you expected, contact us and we will talk you through the returns process. Keep the item unworn and in its original packaging while you decide. We would rather help you find something that works than have you keep something you will not wear.", "source": "Lambswool Tartan Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/lambswool-tartan-scarf/" }, { "question": "What exactly am I buying?", "answer": "This is a pack of three pairs of men's mid-calf socks in black, UK size 12.5 to 15.5. The composition is 80% merino wool, 17% polyamide and 3% elastane, as stated by the maker. All three pairs are the same.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Are these pure wool socks?", "answer": "No, and we would rather be straight about that. They are a merino-rich blend at 80% merino wool, with 17% polyamide and 3% elastane. Polyamide and elastane are commonly added to wool socks for strength and stretch.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Why add polyamide and elastane at all?", "answer": "Pure wool socks tend to stretch out and wear through at the pressure points. Polyamide is a tougher fibre, and elastane gives the cuff and arch enough recovery to stay put. It is a standard approach in merino wool socks for men.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Will they itch?", "answer": "Merino is usually softer than coarse wool. They are still wool, so if wool does not agree with your skin they may not suit you.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "How thick are they?", "answer": "They are deliberately thin. This is a lightweight dress-weight knit rather than a cushioned boot sock, which is what lets them fit inside normal shoes without crowding the toes.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Can I wear these with a suit?", "answer": "Yes, that is one of the main uses. The mid-calf length keeps your leg covered when you sit down, and the slim knit works under tailored trousers and leather dress shoes.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Are they warm enough for winter?", "answer": "They are designed for moderately cold weather, not deep cold. The maker specifically notes they are not intended for very cold or frosty conditions. For an ordinary cool day indoors and out they are comfortably warm.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Can I hike in them?", "answer": "The maker says no, and we would agree. Hiking needs a thicker cushioned sock. These are thin dress socks for daily wear, not a trail sock.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Will they work in stiff leather boots?", "answer": "The maker advises against stiff leather boots. A thin sock in a rigid boot leaves too little padding and the sock takes more abrasion than it is built for. Save these for shoes.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "How high do they sit on the leg?", "answer": "They are mid-calf, so roughly halfway up the lower leg. That is higher than an ankle sock and lower than a knee-high, which is the usual length to wear with trousers.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Do merino socks really help with sweaty feet?", "answer": "We make no breathability or moisture claim for these socks, and no test is given. They are an 80% merino wool blend for everyday wear.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Do they smell after a day of wear?", "answer": "We make no odour claim for these socks. Air them between wears and wash them inside out at up to 30°C when they need it.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Can I wear a pair two days running?", "answer": "Some people air merino socks overnight and wear them again. With three pairs in the pack, though, you have enough to rotate daily and wash a few times a week.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What size are they?", "answer": "UK size 12.5 to 15.5, which the maker labels XL. The maker's size chart gives this as EU 47 to 50 and a foot length of 30 to 32 cm. This is a large size, so check it against your shoe size before ordering.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What colour do they come in?", "answer": "Black. All three pairs in the pack are black.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What does a flat seam mean?", "answer": "Ordinary socks have a bulky ridge of stitching across the toes. A flat seam lays that joint down almost level, so there is nothing hard pressing on your toenails. It makes a real difference on long days of walking.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "How do I wash them?", "answer": "Machine wash at a maximum of 30°C on a delicate cycle, with the socks turned inside out. Do not tumble dry, do not iron and do not bleach.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Can I put them in the tumble dryer?", "answer": "No. Heat and tumbling shrink and felt wool. Reshape each sock while damp and dry it flat, away from radiators and direct sun.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Should I use fabric softener?", "answer": "Better not to. Softener coats the fibres. A gentle wool-friendly detergent is the safer choice.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Will they shrink?", "answer": "Hot water or a dryer is what causes shrinkage in wool. Stick to the 30°C maximum on a delicate cycle and let them air dry.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Do they pill?", "answer": "Any wool blend can pill a little where it rubs, usually at the instep or inside the shoe. Turning the socks inside out to wash reduces it, and a light shave with a fabric comb tidies up anything that appears.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "How long should a pair last?", "answer": "That depends on how often you wear them and how abrasive your shoes are. Rotating between the three pairs spreads the wear across the whole set. Washing cool and air drying helps too.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Are they good for the office?", "answer": "Yes. The thin knit, mid-calf length, plain weave and black colour make them well suited to desk work and meetings.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Can women wear them?", "answer": "They are made and sized as men's socks, and this pack is UK 12.5 to 15.5, which is a large size. There is nothing in the knit that stops anyone wearing them if that size fits.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What are the weave and fit?", "answer": "The maker lists the weave type as plain and the fit as regular. In practice that means a smooth knit with no pattern and an ordinary sock fit, neither tight nor loose.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Where are they made?", "answer": "The maker gives the country of origin as Latvia.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Do they make a good gift?", "answer": "A three-pack of soft wool socks is an easy present for most men, since it is useful and hard to get wrong on taste. Just confirm the size first. These are UK 12.5 to 15.5.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What is the difference between these and cheap wool socks?", "answer": "Mostly the fibre. These are 80% merino wool, which is usually finer and softer than coarse wool. The elastane in the blend also helps the sock keep its shape.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Can I iron them?", "answer": "No. The maker's care guide says do not iron, do not bleach and do not tumble dry. Socks do not need ironing in any case. Reshape them while damp and let them air dry.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What if they are not right for me?", "answer": "If the fit, the length or the weight is not what you hoped, contact our support team and we will walk you through the return and exchange process for your country. Keep them unworn and in their original packaging where you can, as that makes the process quicker. We would rather sort it out than leave you with socks you will not wear.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Men, 3 Pairs", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-men-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What exactly is in this pack?", "answer": "You get three pairs of women's mid-cut socks in dark grey, UK size 6 to 8. They are knitted in the same merino blend and sold together as a single pack.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What are the socks made from?", "answer": "The stated composition is 80% merino wool, 17% polyamide and 3% elastane. That makes it a merino-rich blend, not a pure wool sock. Polyamide and elastane are commonly added to wool socks for strength and stretch.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Are these pure wool socks?", "answer": "No. They are 80% merino wool with 17% polyamide and 3% elastane. Pure wool socks tend to stretch and wear through faster, which is why most makers add a synthetic for structure.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Will merino wool itch?", "answer": "Merino fibres are far finer than ordinary wool, and the maker says the yarn feels pleasant on the skin. They are still wool, and skin differs from person to person, so comfort is personal.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "How thick are they?", "answer": "The maker describes them as rather thin and lightweight. The idea is a sock you can wear inside regular shoes without having to size up.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "How high do they sit on the leg?", "answer": "They are mid-cut, so they sit above the ankle but well below the knee. That height stays hidden under trousers and above the line of most shoes.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Can I wear these for hiking?", "answer": "No. The maker states plainly that they are not designed for hiking. For trails you want a thicker cushioned sock built for that load.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Are they suitable for stiff leather boots?", "answer": "The maker advises against stiff leather boots. The thin knit does not provide the padding that a rigid boot needs to stop rubbing.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Will they handle very cold weather?", "answer": "They are not intended for very cold or frosty conditions. Think autumn and mild winter days indoors and around town rather than deep freeze.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "How do merino socks keep feet warm?", "answer": "Merino fibres have a natural crimp, so the knit holds tiny air pockets. No warmth figure is given for this pair, and it is sold for everyday wear, not frost.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Do they get too hot indoors?", "answer": "The maker says merino traps warm air while preventing overheating. In practice that means feet are less likely to feel stifled when you come in from outside.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Are these good for sweaty feet?", "answer": "We make no moisture claim for these socks, and no test is given. If your feet sweat, air them between wears and wash them inside out at up to 30°C.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Do wool socks smell less than cotton?", "answer": "We make no odour claim for these socks. Airing them between wears and washing them inside out is the simple routine.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What is a flat seam and why does it matter?", "answer": "It is a toe join sewn flat rather than raised. A raised seam can press into the end of your toes inside a firm shoe, so a flat one removes a common rub point.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Is the toe seam really flat?", "answer": "Yes. The maker states the flat seam is there for irritation-free comfort in the toe area. It sits level across the toes instead of forming a ridge.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What size are they?", "answer": "UK size 6 to 8. The maker's size chart gives this as EU 39 to 42 and a foot length of 24.5 to 26.5 cm.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What colour are they?", "answer": "Dark grey. All three pairs in the pack are the same dark grey, with a soft marl look in the photographs.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Where are they made?", "answer": "The maker gives the country of origin as Latvia.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "How do I wash them?", "answer": "Machine wash at a maximum of 30°C on a delicate cycle with the socks turned inside out. Do not tumble dry, do not iron and do not bleach.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry them?", "answer": "No. The maker says do not tumble dry. Heat from a dryer can shrink and felt wool. Let them air dry away from radiators and direct sun.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Should I use fabric softener?", "answer": "Better not to. Softener coats the fibre and can reduce how well wool breathes and wicks, which undoes the main reason you bought them.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Will they shrink?", "answer": "Wool shrinks with heat and agitation. Sticking to a cool delicate wash and air drying is the simplest way to keep them the size you bought.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "How long will a pair last?", "answer": "That depends on how often you wear them and what shoes you pair them with. Rotating the three pairs spreads the wear, and washing cool helps a lot.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Can I wear them to the office?", "answer": "Yes. The thin mid-cut knit fits smart footwear without bunching, and dark grey works with most work clothes.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Are they warm enough for travel?", "answer": "They suit planes and trains where cabins swing between cold and stuffy, since a thin wool sock fits easily in travel shoes.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Can men wear them?", "answer": "The maker sells them as women's socks in UK size 6 to 8. Fit comes down to the size, so they will only suit a foot in that range.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Do they lose their shape?", "answer": "The blend includes 3% elastane, which gives the knit its stretch. Washing cool and letting them air dry helps keep that stretch working.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "Do these make a good gift?", "answer": "A three-pair pack is an easy present for autumn and winter, and merino is a step up from the usual cotton multipack. Pair them with something else from the cashmere and merino accessories range if you want a bigger gift.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What are the weave and fit?", "answer": "The maker lists the weave type as plain and the fit as regular. That means a smooth knit with no pattern and an ordinary sock fit.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What if they are not right for me?", "answer": "Keep them unworn and in their original packaging and contact us with your order number, and we will talk you through returning or exchanging the pack. If the issue is fit, tell us which size you tried and how it sat, since that usually makes the next choice straightforward.", "source": "Merino Wool Socks for Women, 3-Pair Pack", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-socks-women-3-pairs/" }, { "question": "What is this scarf made from?", "answer": "It is made from 100% cashmere, with a 2 ply construction, as stated by the maker. No other fibre is named in the composition. The maker describes it as a classic cashmere scarf, and this one is plain white.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "What does 2 ply actually mean?", "answer": "Ply refers to how many strands are twisted together to make the yarn. A 2 ply yarn uses two fine strands rather than one, which gives the finished cloth a little more body and a smoother feel. It is a common construction for a scarf that needs to be warm but not bulky.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "How big is the scarf?", "answer": "The scarf measures 164 x 30 cm. That is long enough to loop once around the neck with two even ends left over, and narrow enough to sit flat under a coat collar. It is a practical everyday length rather than an oversized wrap.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Is this a men's or women's scarf?", "answer": "The maker sells it under the women's department. In practice the plain white finish and the 164 x 30 cm size are unisex in feel, and the maker's own photograph shows it worn by a man and a woman.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "White. In the photographs it reads as a soft white, with a fringe in the same colour. The maker describes the scarf as true coloured.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Is it woven or knitted?", "answer": "Woven. The maker describes it as woven for warmth, in a 2 ply cashmere yarn. That gives a flat, fine cloth, not a chunky knit.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Is cashmere warm enough for a cold winter?", "answer": "Cashmere feels warm for its weight. A 2 ply scarf like this suits cold commutes and open-collar coats. In very harsh conditions most people layer it with a hat and gloves rather than asking the scarf to do all the work.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Will it feel scratchy?", "answer": "Cashmere fibres are much finer than standard sheep's wool, which is why cashmere is usually comfortable against bare skin. People who find wool itchy often get on well with it. If you have very sensitive skin, keep in mind that any natural fibre can feel slightly different from person to person.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "How should I wash it?", "answer": "The care instruction from the maker is dry clean only. Do not machine wash it. Between cleans, airing the scarf for a few hours is usually enough to freshen it.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Can I hand wash it instead?", "answer": "The maker specifies dry clean only, so hand washing goes against the stated care label. If you want this scarf to last, follow the dry clean instruction. Washing cashmere at home carries a real risk of felting or stretching.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "How do I store it in summer?", "answer": "Fold it flat and keep it in a drawer or a closed box rather than on a hanger, since hanging can stretch the fabric over time. Make sure it is clean before storage. A cedar block or a moth sachet nearby is sensible, as natural fibres can attract moths.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "What if it starts to pill?", "answer": "Light pilling is normal with any natural fibre where fabric rubs against a coat or bag strap. Lift the pills gently with a cashmere comb or a soft fabric shaver rather than pulling them off by hand. Doing this occasionally keeps the surface looking smooth.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Will it snag easily?", "answer": "Fine fibres can catch on rough surfaces, zips, velcro and sharp jewellery. Treat it the way you would treat a good knit and it will be fine. If a thread does pull, ease it back through from the reverse side rather than cutting it.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "How do I tie it?", "answer": "The simplest way is the loop, fold it in half, pass it around the neck and pull the ends through the loop. At 164 cm you can also drape it flat down both sides of a coat, or wrap it twice for a snugger fit. The plain finish looks tidy in all three.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Does it work under a suit jacket?", "answer": "Yes. The 30 cm width lies flat enough to sit inside a jacket or overcoat collar without bulking out the neckline. This is one of the reasons a plain scarf is often recommended over a thick patterned one for tailoring.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Is this suitable as a gift?", "answer": "It is a common gift choice because cashmere feels special and a plain scarf avoids the guesswork of matching someone's taste in pattern. There is no sizing to get wrong either.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "What grade of cashmere is used?", "answer": "The composition is 100% cashmere in a 2 ply yarn, as stated by the maker.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Where is it made?", "answer": "The maker gives the country of origin as the United Kingdom.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Is it a bright white or an off-white?", "answer": "The maker names the colour White. In the photographs it reads as a soft, slightly warm white, not a stark bright white. Screens vary, so expect a small difference in daylight.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Is there a fringe on the ends?", "answer": "Yes. The photographs show a fringe at both short ends, in the same white as the rest of the scarf.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Can I wear it indoors?", "answer": "Plenty of people do. Because cashmere is light, it does not feel oppressive in a cool office or a draughty house in the way a heavy wool scarf can. That is part of what makes a plain cashmere scarf such a useful everyday piece.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Is it good for travel?", "answer": "It packs down small and weighs very little, which is why cashmere is a favourite among frequent travellers. Many people use a scarf like this as a light blanket on a cold flight. Fold it rather than scrunching it to avoid deep creases.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Will it crease in a bag?", "answer": "Cashmere creases less than many woven fabrics and tends to relax out. If it looks rumpled, hang it in a steamy bathroom for a short while and let the fibres settle. Avoid pressing a hot iron directly onto it.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "How does cashmere compare with merino?", "answer": "Both are fine natural fibres. Cashmere usually feels softer, while merino is often easier to wash. If you want the softest feel in a range of cashmere and merino accessories, cashmere is the one to try.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Will a white scarf show marks?", "answer": "A pale scarf shows make-up, collar grime and dye rubbing off a dark coat sooner than a dark scarf does. Air it between wears and have it dry cleaned when it needs it, since the care instruction is dry clean only.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "How long should it last?", "answer": "That depends on how it is worn and cared for. Dry cleaning as the maker instructs, flat storage and the occasional de-pilling make the biggest difference.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "Can I wear it in the rain?", "answer": "Light drizzle is usually fine. Heavy rain is best avoided, since a soaked scarf takes a long time to dry and may lose some shape. Lay it flat to dry naturally, away from radiators.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "What should I check when it arrives?", "answer": "Have a look at the weave, the edges and the overall measurement across the scarf. Give it a gentle shake and let it hang for a day so it settles. If anything looks wrong, get in touch before wearing it.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "How do I know this is real cashmere?", "answer": "The composition stated by the maker is 100% cashmere. Real cashmere has a dry, soft hand, not a slippery one. We publish the maker's stated composition and do not make our own claims about grading.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me?", "answer": "Contact our team with your order details and we will walk you through the returns process for your country. Keep the scarf unworn and in its original packaging while you decide, as that makes any return much easier. If you simply want advice on sizing or styling before you commit, message us and we will help.", "source": "Pure Cashmere Scarf, Plain 2 Ply Woven Scarf", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/pure-cashmere-scarf-plain/" }, { "question": "What is this vase made from?", "answer": "It is made from ceramic porcelain, as stated by the maker. The surface has a frosted finish rather than a high gloss glaze, which gives the gold a soft satin look.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "How tall is the vase?", "answer": "It stands about 25.4 cm tall. That is roughly 25 cm, which is a comfortable mid-height for dining tables, consoles and open shelving.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "How wide is it?", "answer": "It is about 10.7 cm across at its widest point, near the base. The maker gives the dimensions as 10.7 cm L x 10.7 cm W x 25.4 cm H.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "The colour is light gold. It has a brushed, frosted look rather than a mirror shine, so it reads as a warm accent in a room.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Can it hold water for fresh flowers?", "answer": "Yes. The vase holds water, so you can use it with fresh cut stems. Rinse and refill the water every couple of days to keep blooms looking their best.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for dried flowers?", "answer": "It is. Dried grasses, pampas, bunny tails and preserved eucalyptus all suit the frosted finish, and the maker lists dried and artificial flowers among its uses.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Will artificial stems work in it?", "answer": "Yes. Faux stems sit well in the tapered body and need no water at all. If your faux stems are very light, add a few decorative pebbles or a little sand for ballast.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "How many stems does it hold?", "answer": "The vase narrows towards the top, so it suits a few stems or a small bunch better than a large bouquet. Fewer stems give a sparse minimalist look, and a small trimmed bunch gives a fuller display.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Is the opening wide or narrow?", "answer": "The opening is narrower than the base. The body is about 10.7 cm across at its widest and tapers gently towards the rim, which helps hold stems fairly upright.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Does it come with flowers?", "answer": "No. The vase is supplied on its own. Any flowers, grasses or branches shown in styling photographs are there to show scale and are not included.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "What style of room does it suit?", "answer": "The maker describes it as minimalist, with modern rustic farmhouse rooms in mind. The light gold works with pale wood, linen, stone and brass on a living room shelf or sideboard.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I use it in a bathroom?", "answer": "Yes. Ceramic handles humidity well, so a bathroom shelf or windowsill is fine. Dried stems or faux greenery tend to be the easiest choice in a steamy room.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Is it safe near a fireplace or mantelpiece?", "answer": "It can be displayed on a mantelpiece as a decorative piece. Keep it back from direct flame or very high heat, and make sure it sits fully on the surface rather than overhanging the edge.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "What shape is the vase?", "answer": "It is round when seen from above, with a plain tapered body. It is widest near the base, about 10.7 cm across, and narrows gently to the opening at the top. There are no handles and no raised pattern.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Which size is this?", "answer": "This is the maker's largest size in this design, about 25.4 cm tall and 10.7 cm across, in the light gold colour. One vase is supplied.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Hand wash with warm water and a small amount of mild washing-up liquid, then dry with a soft cloth. Skip the dishwasher and avoid abrasive pads, which can scuff a frosted surface.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "How do I remove water marks inside?", "answer": "Fill with warm water and a little white vinegar, leave it for an hour, then rinse and dry. A soft bottle brush helps reach the base without scratching.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I put it in the dishwasher?", "answer": "It is better not to. Dishwasher heat and detergent can dull frosted finishes over time, and ceramic pieces can chip when they knock against racks or other items.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Will the finish scratch easily?", "answer": "Treat it like any ceramic homeware. Avoid scouring pads and dragging it across rough surfaces. A felt pad underneath protects both the vase base and your furniture.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I use it outdoors?", "answer": "It is intended as indoor decor. Occasional use on a covered patio table for an evening is fine, but leaving ceramic outside through frost or rain risks cracking.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Does it work as a single stem vase?", "answer": "It does. One sculptural branch or a couple of tall grasses looks intentional in it, and the narrower opening keeps a single stem from leaning too far.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I group it with other vases?", "answer": "Yes, and it usually looks better that way. Set it with one shorter and one taller piece in similar neutral tones for a simple grouping on a sideboard or shelf.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for a wedding table?", "answer": "It works well as a wedding table vase or centrepiece. The neutral light gold suits most colour schemes, and the 25 cm height is visible without blocking conversation across the table.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Would this make a good gift?", "answer": "It can. The maker suggests it as a gift for birthdays, parties and other occasions, and a plain vase in a warm metallic tone is an easy thing to place in most homes.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Should I gift it with flowers already in it?", "answer": "You can, though transporting a full vase is awkward. Many people gift the vase with a wrapped bunch of dried stems beside it, which travels better and lasts far longer.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Does it need a liner?", "answer": "No liner is needed for fresh flowers since the vase holds water. If you want to use loose soil for a plant, pot the plant separately and sit the pot inside instead.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I grow hydroponic plants in it?", "answer": "Yes, it suits water-propagated cuttings and hydroponic stems. Change the water regularly and rinse the inside so it stays clear.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "Does the gold finish go all the way round?", "answer": "Yes. The light gold colour covers the whole outside of the vase, from the foot to the rim, with the same frosted finish all over.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "How does delivery and returns work?", "answer": "Delivery and return terms are shown at checkout for your country before you confirm your order. Keep the original packaging until you have checked the item.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for my space?", "answer": "If the size, tone or style does not suit once it is home, get in touch using the contact details on your order and we will talk you through the returns process. Repack it in the original box and let us know the order number so it can be sorted quickly.", "source": "Light Gold Ceramic Vase 25 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-gold-ceramic-vase-25-cm/" }, { "question": "What is this product?", "answer": "It is a tall white ceramic floor vase that stands about 51 cm high. It is made of ceramic with a brushed finish and has a narrow opening of roughly 5 cm.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "How tall is it exactly?", "answer": "The maker gives the height as approximately 51 cm, which is why it is described as a 50 cm vase. That puts the top of the vase at around knee height for most adults when it sits on the floor.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "How wide is the base?", "answer": "The base measures about 8 cm across. The overall product dimensions are given as 8 cm long by 8 cm wide by 51 cm high.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "How big is the opening at the top?", "answer": "The opening is around 5 cm across. That is narrow by design, so stems gather into a neat upright bundle rather than spreading apart.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What material is it made from?", "answer": "It is ceramic with a brushed finish on the outside surface, as stated by the maker.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What does a brushed finish look like?", "answer": "It is a soft, low-sheen surface rather than a high-gloss one. It tends to hold light gently and show fewer fingerprints than a polished glaze.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "It is white. This is the white version in the 50 cm height, and one vase is supplied.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I put fresh flowers and water in it?", "answer": "The maker notes that the white version of this vase is waterproof and can be used with fresh flowers. Always stand it on a protected surface and check for leaks the first time you fill it.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for dried flowers?", "answer": "Yes. The maker suggests dried flowers, pampas grass and decorative branches, and the narrow opening keeps the stems gathered.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Will pampas grass work in it?", "answer": "Yes, the maker lists pampas grass among the stems it suits. Three to five plumes usually fill the shape without crowding the 5 cm opening.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Are flowers included?", "answer": "No. The vase is supplied on its own, and any flowers, grasses or branches shown in photographs are for display purposes only.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What shape is it?", "answer": "The maker lists the shape as oblong. In practice it is a tall slim form that narrows gently at the waist, with a flat base about 8 cm across and an opening about 5 cm across.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Does it come with anything on the bottom to stop it sliding?", "answer": "The maker states that a non-slip sticker is fitted to the base. This helps stop the vase sliding on hard floors and reduces the chance of scratching furniture.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Where in a room does it work best?", "answer": "Corners, beside a sofa, at the end of a hallway, next to a bookcase, or flanking a fireplace. It suits a living room corner because it fills height without taking up much floor space.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Can it go on a table or sideboard?", "answer": "Yes, as long as the surface is stable and deep enough. At 51 cm tall it will dominate a small table, so a sideboard, console or wide shelf tends to suit it better.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Is it stable enough to stand on the floor?", "answer": "It has a flat 8 cm base and a non-slip sticker underneath, which helps. Because it is tall and slim, keep it out of walkways and away from the edge of rugs where it could be knocked.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "How many stems should I use?", "answer": "Usually three to seven, depending on how thick the stems are. The narrow 5 cm opening fills quickly, and an overstuffed neck looks less tidy than a loose gather.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What stem length should I buy?", "answer": "Aim for stems that sit roughly 60 to 90 cm long, so they rise clearly above the rim. Long branches can go taller still if the ceiling and the corner allow it.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Will it suit a modern interior?", "answer": "Plain white and a simple slim shape sit comfortably in modern rooms. There is no printed pattern, only the fine lines of the brushed finish, so it suits a minimalist look.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Does it work in a traditional room?", "answer": "Yes. White is neutral enough to sit against wallpaper, wood panelling or heavier furniture, and the brushed finish keeps it from looking too stark.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I use it in a bedroom?", "answer": "It works well in a bedroom corner or beside a wardrobe. Dried stems are easier than fresh ones there because there is no water to change.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for an office or shop?", "answer": "It suits entrances, waiting areas, reception corners and display windows. The slim base means it does not obstruct movement in a tight space.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "How do I clean the outside?", "answer": "Wipe it with a soft dry cloth, or a slightly damp one if needed. Avoid abrasive pads, bleach and scouring powder, as these can dull a brushed surface.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "How do I clean inside a neck this narrow?", "answer": "Half fill the vase with warm water and a drop of washing-up liquid, swirl it, then rinse. A long bottle brush with a soft head can reach further if there is residue.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Can it go in the dishwasher?", "answer": "We would not recommend it. Hand washing is gentler on a brushed ceramic finish and avoids knocks against other items in the rack.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I use it outdoors?", "answer": "It is intended as indoor decor. A sheltered balcony or covered porch may be fine in mild weather, but frost, rain and wind are a risk for any tall ceramic piece.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Does it make a good gift?", "answer": "It can. The maker suggests it as a gift for weddings, birthdays, anniversaries and housewarmings, and a plain white vase is easy to place in most homes.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Should I buy one or two?", "answer": "A single vase works well in a corner. A matching pair either side of a fireplace, doorway or console gives a more symmetrical, deliberate look.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Is the surface smooth or textured?", "answer": "The maker describes the surface as a brushed finish. In the photographs it shows as fine horizontal lines running round the vase, with a low sheen rather than a gloss.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for my room when it arrives?", "answer": "Keep the packaging until you have stood it in place and tried it with your stems. If the size or look does not suit, get in touch with our team and we will talk you through the returns process.", "source": "Tall White Ceramic Floor Vase 50 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/tall-white-ceramic-floor-vase-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What exactly do I get in this set?", "answer": "You get two heart-shaped ceramic vases, one medium and one small. They are sold together as a matching pair, so there is nothing extra to buy to complete the look. Flowers and stems are not included.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What are the vases made from?", "answer": "They are made from ceramic with a matt sand glaze, as stated by the maker. The matt glaze means a soft, low-sheen surface with a frosted texture rather than a shiny one.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What does a matt sand glaze actually look like?", "answer": "It is a flat, slightly textured white finish with very little reflection, and a fine speckle shows in the photographs. The maker describes it as a frosted texture.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What colour are they?", "answer": "White. The matt finish makes the white look soft rather than stark, and it sits comfortably against wood, stone, linen and painted walls.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "How big are they?", "answer": "The maker gives the larger vase as about 17.1 cm wide. The smaller vase is about 13 cm wide and 14 cm tall, with a neck of about 4.2 cm. The overall product dimensions are stated as 23.3 cm long by 15.3 cm wide by 23.3 cm high.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Which is the medium one and which is the small one?", "answer": "The medium vase is the larger of the two, about 17.1 cm wide. The small vase is about 13 cm wide and 14 cm tall. The difference in size is what gives the pair its stepped, arranged look on a shelf.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can I put water and fresh flowers in them?", "answer": "The maker suggests dried flowers, pampas grass, reeds and other stems, and does not say whether the vases hold water. Test carefully with a small amount of water on a protected surface first, or stand a slim glass or plastic liner inside the neck for fresh stems.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Are they good for dried flowers?", "answer": "Yes, dried arrangements are one of the easiest matches here, and the maker suggests them. Dried flowers need no water, they do not wilt, and the matt white sets them off well.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Will pampas grass work in them?", "answer": "Yes, the maker lists natural pampas grass among the stems that suit these vases. It works nicely in the larger of the two. Keep the plumes small and trim the stems so the arrangement is not top-heavy.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can I use faux or silk stems?", "answer": "Absolutely. Faux stems suit these vases well because you never have to empty or rinse them. Choose stems with a matt or natural looking finish so they sit well against the soft white glaze.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Do they work with real potted plants?", "answer": "They are vases rather than planters and have no drainage, so do not pot directly into them. You can slip a small nursery pot inside if it fits, with a saucer underneath to catch water. Check the fit before you commit.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Is this a good table centrepiece?", "answer": "Yes, the maker suggests the dining table as a place for them. Set the two together in the middle of the table and you get a change in height without blocking sightlines across it.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Where else can I put them?", "answer": "A hallway console, a mantelpiece, a bookshelf, a sideboard, a bedroom chest of drawers or a windowsill well back from the edge. They suit any flat, stable surface where they are not going to be knocked. Splitting the pair across two spots in the same room also works.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can the two vases be separated?", "answer": "Yes. They sit together as a couple, but each one stands alone perfectly well. Putting one on a shelf and one on a side table creates a repeated detail that ties a room together.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Do they suit a minimalist room?", "answer": "They do, and the maker describes the style as minimalist. A plain white matt finish and a simple outline do the work. Keep the arrangement sparse, a few stems rather than a full bouquet.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Will they suit a colourful or maximalist room?", "answer": "White tends to act as a pause between busier pieces, so yes. Against patterned wallpaper or a bold shelf of books, the matt white gives the eye somewhere to rest. You can also lean into colour with bright dried stems.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What is the hollow heart design?", "answer": "Each vase has a rounded body with a heart-shaped opening through the middle and a short neck at the top for stems. The maker calls it a hollow heart shape. You can see through the heart to whatever sits behind the vase.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "How do I clean them?", "answer": "Wipe the outside with a soft, dry or very slightly damp cloth. For the inside, rinse with warm water and a drop of mild washing-up liquid, then let it air dry fully. Avoid abrasive pads and strong cleaners that can dull a matt glaze.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can they go in the dishwasher?", "answer": "The maker does not say the vases are dishwasher safe, so hand cleaning is the sensible choice. Dishwasher heat and detergent can mark a matt glaze over time. A rinse and air dry is all they usually need.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Does the matt finish mark easily?", "answer": "Matt glazes can show finger grease and water spots more than gloss finishes. A quick wipe with a dry cloth usually clears it. Handle the vases by the base when you move them to keep marks to a minimum.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Where should I place them in a busy home?", "answer": "They are ceramic and will break if dropped or knocked off a surface. Place them well back from the edge, on a stable shelf or table, and away from busy walkways. A higher shelf is the sensible spot in a lively household.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can I use them outdoors?", "answer": "These are designed as indoor decor. Frost, heavy rain and temperature swings are hard on ceramic and can cause cracking. A sheltered covered porch is the furthest you should push it.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Do they make a good wedding present?", "answer": "They can. A matching pair of heart vases is an obvious fit for a wedding or engagement, and the maker suggests them as a gift for weddings and housewarmings. The plain white works with most styles of home.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What about a housewarming gift?", "answer": "Good choice. A new home often has plenty of furniture and very little decoration, and a pair of vases fills that gap straight away. Pairing the set with a bundle of dried stems makes it look complete on arrival.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Is this a sensible Valentine's or anniversary gift?", "answer": "The heart shape makes it an easy romantic gift that lasts far longer than a bouquet. It avoids being overly sweet because the finish is plain white and the shape is simple.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "How should I arrange stems in them?", "answer": "Keep it loose. Three to seven stems at mixed heights usually looks better than a packed bunch, and trimming stems so they clear the rim by roughly half the vase height keeps the proportions right. Put the taller arrangement in the larger vase.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Do I need both vases filled?", "answer": "Not at all. Leaving one empty and filling the other is a common styling trick and keeps the shape of the empty vase visible. Try it both ways and see which suits your shelf.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What is the base like?", "answer": "The maker states that the bottom surface is polished and gives the vase a stable footing. A small felt pad underneath will protect polished furniture if you move the vases often.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "How wide is the neck?", "answer": "The maker gives the neck of the smaller vase as about 4.2 cm. That suits a few slim stems, a small bunch of dried grasses or one or two faux stems rather than a full bouquet.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What if they are not right when they arrive?", "answer": "If the set is damaged, or it simply does not suit your space, contact us with your order number and a photo if there is damage, and we will talk you through the returns process. Keep the original packaging until you are happy with the set.", "source": "White Heart Ceramic Vases, Set of 2 Matt Sand Glaze Vases", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-heart-ceramic-vases-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What exactly is this product?", "answer": "It is a small decorative vase made from ceramic, which the maker describes as terracotta ceramic. It stands around 15.3 cm tall and measures about 12.7 cm across, with a round shape and a textured white surface.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "How tall is the vase?", "answer": "It is approximately 15.3 cm tall. That puts it in short-vase territory, which is useful for low shelves, dining tables and anywhere a tall vase would feel top-heavy.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "What are the full dimensions?", "answer": "Roughly 12.7 cm long by 12.7 cm wide by 15.3 cm high. The length and width are equal because the vase is round.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "What material is it made from?", "answer": "Ceramic. The maker specifically lists it as terracotta ceramic with a textured surface rather than a smooth, high-gloss glaze.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "White. It is a plain white body, so the interest comes from the texture of the surface rather than from pattern or colour.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Is the finish shiny or matt?", "answer": "The maker describes it as a particle surface design, which is a fine speckled texture rather than a smooth polished glaze. In the photographs it has a matt, low-shine look.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I put fresh flowers and water in it?", "answer": "It is a vase, so it is intended to hold stems. If you plan to use water, fill it, leave it standing on a protected surface for an hour, and check for seepage before trusting it on timber or fabric.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Will it work with dried flowers?", "answer": "Yes, and that is one of the easiest ways to use it. Dried stems, bunny tails, pampas and preserved eucalyptus all suit a short textured vase, and there is no water to worry about.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Is it a good size for tulips?", "answer": "It can be, but you will need to trim the stems down. Tulips look best when roughly two thirds of the stem sits above the rim, so cut to suit the 15.3 cm height.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "How many stems will it hold?", "answer": "That depends on stem thickness, but think of it as a small posy vase rather than a bouquet vase. A handful of slim stems or three to five thicker ones is a comfortable amount.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Is it heavy enough to stay upright?", "answer": "The vase is short and round, about 12.7 cm across and 15.3 cm tall, so the body is wide relative to its height. Keep stems trimmed to suit and it sits steadily on a flat surface.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "What shape is it?", "answer": "It is round, with a full, rounded body that narrows to a short neck and a slightly flared rim. The maker lists the shape as round.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "What does the particle surface look like?", "answer": "It is a fine speckle across the white surface, with a slightly grainy feel rather than a smooth gloss. Up close you can see small darker flecks in the white.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Is this a single vase or a set?", "answer": "It is a single vase in white. The maker gives the size as about 12.7 cm by 12.7 cm by 15.3 cm.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Will the one I receive match the photos exactly?", "answer": "The shape, colour and size are as shown. With a textured, speckled surface there can be slight variation in how the finish looks from piece to piece.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "The measurements say about 15.3 cm. How accurate is that?", "answer": "The maker measures by hand, so small deviations are normal. If you are fitting it into a tight gap, allow a centimetre of tolerance either way.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Does it suit a modern home or only a farmhouse one?", "answer": "Both. The maker says the colour suits styles from modern to rustic farmhouse. The texture reads as rustic, but the shape is simple enough for a minimalist room, and plain white works on a dining table.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Where does it look best?", "answer": "Mantels, open shelving, console tables, bedside tables and kitchen windowsills all work. It also suits dried flowers on a bathroom shelf, where height is usually limited.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I use it in a bathroom?", "answer": "Yes. Humidity is not a problem for ceramic. Just keep it away from the edge of a basin where it could be knocked.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I use it outdoors?", "answer": "Occasional use on a covered patio table is fine. We would not leave ceramic outside in frost or heavy rain, as freezing water inside can crack it.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Wipe the outside with a soft dry or barely damp cloth. Avoid scourers and strong cleaners, which can wear away at a textured surface over time.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "How do I clean the inside after fresh flowers?", "answer": "Rinse with warm water, use a bottle brush if there is residue, and let it dry fully before putting it away. A splash of white vinegar helps with hard water marks.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Is it dishwasher safe?", "answer": "We do not recommend it. Dishwasher heat and detergent are harsh on decorative ceramic, and hand washing takes less than a minute.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Can it go in a microwave or oven?", "answer": "No. It is a decorative vase, not cookware, and the maker gives no heat rating for it.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Will it scratch my furniture?", "answer": "The base is ceramic, so dragging it across timber could mark the surface. Lift it when you move it, or add small felt pads underneath if it lives on a polished table.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Does it come with flowers or stems included?", "answer": "No. Styling items shown in photography are for display purposes. You receive the vase.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Would it work as a gift?", "answer": "It can. The maker suggests it for birthdays, weddings and housewarmings, and a white textured vase is easy to place in most homes.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I buy more than one and group them?", "answer": "Grouping is a good look with short vases. Two or three at slightly different fill levels, or one with stems and one empty, reads better than a single piece on a long shelf.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "What if it arrives damaged?", "answer": "Keep the packaging and get in touch with photographs of the item and the box, and we will talk you through the next steps.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for my space?", "answer": "If the size or look does not suit once you see it at home, contact us within the returns window and we will walk you through sending it back. Return it unused and in its original packaging so it travels safely.", "source": "White Rustic Ceramic Vase 15 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/white-rustic-ceramic-vase-15-cm/" }, { "question": "What exactly is a catchall tray?", "answer": "It is a shallow open tray that sits on a surface and holds the small things you carry every day. Keys, coins, a watch, rings, a phone. The point is to give those items a border so they stop spreading across the table.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "What is this tray made from?", "answer": "Cowhide leather, with stainless steel rivets set into the four corners. That is what the maker states. The colour is black.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "How does it hold its shape?", "answer": "The four corners each have a rivet that snaps together. When you fasten them, the flat leather square pulls up into a shallow tray with walls. Unsnap the rivets and it flattens out again.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "What size is it when it is set up as a tray?", "answer": "Roughly 15 x 15 cm across the base with sides about 4.5 cm high. That is the assembled measurement given by the maker.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "What size is it flat?", "answer": "About 21 x 21 cm and roughly 0.5 cm thick, as given by the maker.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Will my phone fit in it?", "answer": "A phone laid flat will generally sit inside the 15 x 15 cm base, though larger handsets may overhang slightly at one edge. It is still fine as a resting spot. If you want the phone fully contained with room to spare, measure your handset first.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Is it a good size for a bedside table?", "answer": "Set up as a tray it takes up about 15 x 15 cm, so it fits on most bedside tables with room left for a lamp and a book. It is small, plain black and folds away if you want the surface clear. For keys, a watch and change it is about right.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "How high are the sides?", "answer": "About 4.5 cm once the four corners are snapped together. That is deep enough to stop coins and rings sliding off, and low enough that you can still see everything in the tray at a glance.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "What shape is it?", "answer": "Square. Laid flat it is a 21 x 21 cm square of leather, and snapped up it becomes a square tray with a base of about 15 x 15 cm.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Does it come in other colours?", "answer": "We sell this tray in black only.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Can I use it for jewellery?", "answer": "Yes. Rings, earrings, bracelets and a watch all sit comfortably in a tray this size. If you want pieces separated rather than mingled, look for a compartmented box instead, since this is a single open space.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Is it a good travel jewellery tray?", "answer": "That is one of its better uses. It unsnaps flat to about half a centimetre thick, slides into a bag, and sets up again in a hotel room so your rings and keycard are not loose on a strange bedside table.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Will the leather scratch my watch?", "answer": "Leather is soft against a watch case and glass, which is why valet trays are usually made from it. Take normal care when you are dropping a watch in next to keys, since keys scratch watches, not the tray.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable as a key tray by the front door?", "answer": "Yes. Put it on a hallway shelf or console table and keys land in the same place each time, which cuts down on the morning search.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Can I put coins in it?", "answer": "Coins are exactly what a catchall tray is for. The raised sides keep them from sliding off the edge of the table, and leather dulls the noise when you empty your pocket into it.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Does it have compartments or dividers?", "answer": "No. It is one open space. If you want divided sections for separate items, a compartmented valet box would be the better format.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Will it slide around on a glossy surface?", "answer": "Leather has a bit of natural grip, so on a wooden chest of drawers or a desk it tends to stay put. On very smooth glass it may shift if nudged, in which case a small felt pad underneath solves it.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for a bathroom?", "answer": "The maker lists the bathroom among its uses, and it can hold a watch and rings while you shower. Keep it away from standing water and splashes, because leather and prolonged moisture do not get along. Wipe up any drips promptly.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Wipe with a dry or barely damp soft cloth. Do not soak it, do not machine wash it and do not put it near a radiator to dry. If it gets wet, blot it and let it air dry naturally.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Can I condition the leather?", "answer": "A small amount of neutral leather conditioner used sparingly can help keep the surface supple over time. Test it on an inside corner first and wipe away any excess so it does not transfer to items you place in the tray.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Will the colour rub off on my hands?", "answer": "We cannot promise how dyed leather behaves on every surface, so run a dry white cloth over it when it arrives and check before you rest pale items in it. Keep it away from long periods of direct sun, which fades leather of any colour.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Will the rivets loosen over time?", "answer": "The rivets are stainless steel and are set into the corners. Like any snap fastening they will feel firm at first and ease a little with repeated use. Unsnapping it only when you actually need it flat keeps them in good shape.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Does it have a lid?", "answer": "No. It is an open tray with four raised sides and nothing to lift or close. That is the point of it: you drop things in and pick them up again with one hand.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Is it a good gift for a man?", "answer": "It works well as a gift for men because it handles the standard pocket load of keys, wallet, watch and change. The maker describes it as unisex though, and it suits jewellery and cosmetics as well as keys.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Is it a good gift for someone who travels often?", "answer": "Yes. A folding tray is one of those small items frequent travellers appreciate because it packs flat and solves the problem of small items going missing in hotel rooms.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on an office desk?", "answer": "It suits a desk well for paperclips, a USB stick, spare change and a phone. Some people keep one at the edge of the desk purely as a spot to drop keys and a lanyard when they sit down.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Does it work in a drawer?", "answer": "It does. Set up as a tray it corrals small items inside a drawer so they stop rolling to the back every time you open it. Check your drawer depth against the 4.5 cm wall height first.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "How do I get it flat again?", "answer": "Pull each corner rivet apart in turn. The leather relaxes back into a flat square. Store it flat under a book for a day or two if the corners want to curl at first.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "Can I use it for make-up?", "answer": "Yes. The maker lists cosmetics and make-up accessories among its uses. Keep lids on anything liquid or powdery, since spills can mark leather.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me when it arrives?", "answer": "If it turns out to be smaller than you pictured or it does not suit the surface you had in mind, get in touch with our team and we will sort out a return or exchange under our standard returns policy. Keep the item in unused condition and tell us what went wrong, since that helps us point you to something that fits better.", "source": "Cowhide Leather Catchall Valet Tray", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-catchall-tray/" }, { "question": "What is this product?", "answer": "It is a small rectangular tray, often called a catchall or valet tray, for the odds and ends you handle every day. It sits on a desk, chest of drawers or shelf and gives keys, rings, coins and pens one place to live. The tray measures 21.5 x 14.7 x 4.8 cm.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Is this real leather?", "answer": "No. The maker states the outer is PU, which is faux leather, wrapped over an MDF core. It has the look and wipe-clean feel of leather without being hide. We say this plainly so there are no surprises when it arrives.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "What are the exact dimensions?", "answer": "It is 21.5 cm long, 14.7 cm wide and 4.8 cm high. That is a little larger than a paperback in footprint and about the height of a stack of a few coasters. Measure your desk corner or shelf against those numbers before ordering.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "Orange, a warm burnt shade as pictured, with a gold-tone metal plate set into the front edge. It works as a warm accent on a dark wood desk or a white shelf. We sell this tray in orange only.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "How deep are the sides?", "answer": "The overall height is 4.8 cm, so the walls are tall enough to hold rings, cuff links and loose change without them rolling out. Taller items such as pens will stick up above the rim, which is normal for a tray of this type.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Will it hold a watch?", "answer": "Yes, a standard wristwatch sits comfortably inside with room to spare. It works as a watch tray on a bedside table, keeping a watch and a wedding band together overnight. Larger dive watches will also fit, though they take up more of the base.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Can I use it for jewellery?", "answer": "It works well as a jewellery tray on a dressing table. Rings, studs, bracelets and a necklace or two fit easily in the open base. There are no internal dividers, so if you want items kept apart you can add a small soft pouch inside.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Is it good for keys by the front door?", "answer": "Yes. The maker suggests it for keys in an hallway. Put it on a hall shelf or console table and keys always land in the same place. The MDF core keeps the base firm when you drop a heavy keyring in.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Does it fit on a desk next to a keyboard?", "answer": "It should. The 21.5 x 14.7 cm footprint is designed to tuck into a corner rather than dominate the surface. If your desk is shallow, check you have about 15 cm of depth free.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Can it hold pens and stationery?", "answer": "Yes. Pens, a highlighter, paper clips, a USB stick and sticky notes all sit fine, though pens will lie flat rather than stand upright. If you want pens standing, pair the tray with a separate pot and use this for the flat items.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Will a phone fit inside?", "answer": "Most modern phones fit within the 21.5 x 14.7 cm base, lying flat. A very large phone in a bulky case may sit slightly proud of one edge. The tray is not a charging dock, so any cable needs to come over the side.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for cosmetics?", "answer": "It makes a tidy dressing table tray for lipsticks, a compact, tweezers and small brushes. Because it wipes clean, any powder dust comes off easily. Keep liquid products upright to avoid spills soaking the sewn edges.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "What is the metal detail on the front?", "answer": "The maker sets a metal plate into the faux leather on one long side. It is gold in tone, as pictured, and it is there for looks. The maker says the plate is securely embedded in the covering.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "What shape is it?", "answer": "Rectangular with rounded corners. As pictured, part of the rim is cut lower than the rest, which makes it easier to reach in and lift things out.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Can it hold a wallet?", "answer": "Yes. The maker lists wallets among the things it is meant for. A standard folding wallet lies flat in the base with room beside it for keys.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Can it hold a TV remote?", "answer": "The maker lists remote controls among its uses. The tray is 21.5 cm long on the outside, so shorter remotes lie flat and longer ones rest at an angle over the rim.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Does it have a lid?", "answer": "No. It is an open tray, so everything in it stays in view and within reach.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Wipe the surface with a soft cloth dampened with plain water, then dry it right away with a clean dry cloth. Do not soak it, and skip bleach, solvents and scouring pads, which can mark or lift the PU finish.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Can I put it in a dishwasher or washing machine?", "answer": "No. The MDF core will swell if it gets wet through, and the faux leather covering is not made for machine washing. Hand wiping is the only method to use.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "What happens if something spills in it?", "answer": "Tip out any liquid straight away, blot with a dry cloth and leave the tray open to air. Faux leather handles a quick splash better than fabric, but standing water can reach the MDF core through the seams, so speed matters.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Will the colour fade?", "answer": "Long spells in strong direct sunlight can dull coloured PU over time, as with most finishes. Position it away from a sunny window ledge if you can.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Can I use it in a bathroom?", "answer": "It is better suited to a dry dressing table or desk. Steam and constant damp are not kind to an MDF core. If you want a tray near a basin, keep it well away from the splash zone.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Is it stackable?", "answer": "No, it is a single open tray and is not designed to stack. If you need layered storage, use two trays side by side on a shelf instead.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Does it come assembled?", "answer": "Yes. It arrives as one finished piece with nothing to build, so you can put it to use straight out of the packaging.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Does it make a good gift?", "answer": "It does. A desk catchall tray is a safe present for a new job, a house move, a graduation or Father's Day, because it suits almost any desk. That helps when you do not know someone's taste well.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Who is it suited to?", "answer": "Anyone who loses keys, rings or cards on a cluttered surface. It fits home offices, shared desks, bedside tables, hallway shelves and dressing tables equally well. The maker suggests it for smaller offices and home workplaces where space is tight.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "Can it hold business cards and receipts?", "answer": "Yes, a small stack of cards or folded receipts sits neatly in the base and stays contained by the 4.8 cm sides. It is handy as a coin and card tray next to a laptop. Just empty it regularly so paper does not build up.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "How does it compare with a plastic desk organiser?", "answer": "A plastic organiser usually has moulded compartments and a hard shine. This one is open, covered in faux leather and sewn at the edges, so it reads more like a piece of desk furniture. The trade off is that it gives you one open space rather than fixed sections.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "What are delivery and returns like?", "answer": "Delivery and returns follow the standard terms shown at checkout for your country storefront. If your order arrives damaged or faulty, get in touch with your order number and photos and we will put it right.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me?", "answer": "If the size, colour or feel does not suit your space, contact our team within the returns window shown at checkout and we will walk you through the process. Keep the tray clean and in its packaging where possible so it can be returned in resellable condition. We would rather help you choose a better fit than have you keep something you will not use.", "source": "Faux Leather Desk Tray Catchall", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-desk-tray-catchall/" }, { "question": "What is this tray actually made from?", "answer": "The outer shell is artificial PU (faux) leather in brown, and the inside of the compartments is a soft suede-feel material. It is not genuine leather. The maker also notes a brushed finish and white contrast stitching around the edges.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Is it real leather?", "answer": "No. It is faux leather, also called PU leather, which is a coated synthetic made to look and feel like hide. We say so plainly so there are no surprises when it arrives. The upside is that it wipes clean and does not need conditioning.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "How big is it?", "answer": "It measures 30.3 cm wide, 20.3 cm deep and 4.1 cm high. That is roughly the footprint of an A4 sheet, slightly longer and a little narrower. The low height means it sits comfortably under a bedside lamp.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "How many compartments does it have?", "answer": "Four built-in compartments. As pictured, three smaller sections run along one long side and one long section runs the full width, so you can keep keys separate from a watch and coins separate from cards. Nothing is removable or adjustable, the layout is fixed.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Will a phone fit inside?", "answer": "Most standard and large phones fit in the biggest section, though a very large phone in a bulky case may sit slightly proud of the edge. The tray is 30.3 cm long overall, so length is rarely the issue. If you want the phone flat and fully contained, measure yours against the longest compartment.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable as a watch tray?", "answer": "Yes, it is one of the main uses. The suede-feel lining is gentle on a watch case and crystal, and keeping the watch in its own pocket keeps it apart from keys and coins. For a watch collection rather than a daily wearer, a dedicated cushioned watch box is still the better option.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Can I use it for jewellery?", "answer": "It works well for everyday pieces like rings, studs, a chain or a bracelet. The soft lining is kind to metal and stones. Fine chains can tangle in an open pocket, so a small pouch inside one compartment helps if that bothers you.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Does it have a lid?", "answer": "No, it is an open tray. That is deliberate, because the whole point is dropping things in without opening anything. If you want valuables covered, slide the tray into a drawer, which it fits thanks to the 4.1 cm height.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Will it slide around on a polished surface?", "answer": "The maker lists anti-slip as a feature. In practice that means it stays put when you drop keys in rather than skating across the bedside table. On very slick glass you may still want to set things down rather than toss them in from a distance.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Is this a good bedside tray organiser?", "answer": "It is designed for exactly that. The slim height keeps it below lamp level, the sections keep keys apart from a watch, and the lining muffles the noise of metal landing at night. It sits neatly next to the alarm clock.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Can it sit on a desk?", "answer": "Yes. It holds pens, earphones, a USB stick, cards, lip balm and loose change, which is most of what clutters a desk surface. Used as a desk organiser tray it keeps the working area clear while leaving everything in reach.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Will it fit inside a drawer?", "answer": "The 4.1 cm height is low enough for most bedroom and desk drawers, and the 30.3 by 20.3 cm footprint suits a standard wide drawer. Measure your drawer's internal depth and clear width before ordering to be sure. Used that way it becomes a tidy drawer organiser tray for ties, straps or stationery.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Does it work in a hallway?", "answer": "It does. A hallway tray by the front door gives keys, sunglasses and a card wallet one fixed home, which cuts down the morning search. Set it on a console table or a shelf at about waist height.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "Brown, a dark chocolate shade as pictured, with white stitching for contrast and a lighter tan-brown lining. The brushed finish gives the surface a bit of texture rather than a flat shine. Brown tends to sit well with wood furniture and neutral rooms.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Is it only for men?", "answer": "The maker lists the target audience as men, mostly because valet trays are traditionally sold that way. There is nothing gender-specific about a brown tray with four pockets. It works as a bedside organiser for anyone.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Wipe the faux leather with a soft, slightly damp cloth and dry it straight away. For the lined pockets, use a soft brush or a vacuum nozzle on low suction to lift dust and grit. Skip bleach, solvents and abrasive pads.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Can I use leather conditioner on it?", "answer": "No need, and it is better not to. Conditioners and waxes are made for genuine hide and can leave a sticky film on a PU surface. A damp cloth is all the care this material asks for.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Will it crack or peel over time?", "answer": "Like any coated material, PU can wear at high-friction points over time. Keeping it out of direct sunlight and away from radiators helps a lot. Avoid dragging sharp keys across the outer face if you want the finish to stay crisp.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Is it waterproof?", "answer": "The PU surface shrugs off a splash if you dry it quickly, but the tray is not waterproof and the suede-feel lining will absorb liquid. Keep drinks away from it and let damp items dry before they go in. Treat it as a dry indoor item.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "How big are the compartments?", "answer": "As pictured by the maker, the three smaller sections are each about 9.5 x 9.5 cm, and the long section runs the full 30.3 cm width of the tray. All four share the same 4.1 cm overall height.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "What does the maker suggest keeping in it?", "answer": "A phone, watches, remote controls, keys, coins, jewellery, stationery, headphones and a wallet. That list covers most of what ends up loose on a desk or bedside table.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Is it rigid or floppy?", "answer": "It is a structured tray with defined walls, so it holds its rectangular shape rather than collapsing. The compartment dividers are part of that structure. It is not a hard case, though, so do not stand on it or stack heavy objects on the edges.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Can I stack two of them?", "answer": "They are not designed to stack and there is no interlocking base. Two side by side on a wide chest of drawers works better, one for everyday carry and one for jewellery. Keeping them level also protects the top edges.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Does it come assembled?", "answer": "Yes, it arrives ready to use. There are no parts to clip together and no tools needed. Unwrap it, set it down and start filling the pockets.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Is it a good gift?", "answer": "It is a safe one, because it is useful without being personal in a risky way. A gift tray for him covers birthdays, Father's Day, housewarmings and Christmas. It also works well paired with a watch, cufflinks or a keyring.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Can it hold sunglasses?", "answer": "Folded sunglasses fit in the longest compartment, though wraparound styles with deep lenses may sit a little high in a 4.1 cm deep pocket. The lining is soft enough not to mark the lenses. For daily use that is usually fine.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "Will loose change scratch the lining?", "answer": "Coins are blunt and the suede-feel surface handles them well, but over years any lining can pick up marks from constant metal contact. Giving coins their own pocket keeps the wear in one place. A quick brush now and then lifts out grit before it rubs.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "What happens if the item arrives damaged?", "answer": "Contact us with your order number and a photo of the problem and we will sort out a replacement or a refund. Keep the packaging until you are happy with it. Damage reported promptly is always easiest to resolve.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "How do I return it?", "answer": "Get in touch with your order details and we will send you return instructions. Items should be unused and in their original packaging where possible. Our full returns policy is linked in the site footer.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me?", "answer": "If the size, colour or finish is not what you pictured, let us know within the returns window and we will arrange a return or an exchange for something that suits better. Tell us what you were hoping for, since a different tray size or a deeper catchall may be the answer. Nobody benefits from a tray sitting in a cupboard.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 4 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-storage-tray-bedside/" }, { "question": "What exactly is this product?", "answer": "It is a valet tray, sometimes called a catchall or a desk organiser. It is a shallow box divided into five compartments, made to hold the small things you empty from your pockets or take off at the end of the day. Keys, coins, a watch, a phone and a wallet are the usual residents.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Is this made from real leather?", "answer": "No. The outer is synthetic leather, also described as faux leather or PU, and the interior is lined with faux suede. The maker states this plainly, and we repeat it here so there is no confusion. If you specifically want genuine hide, this is not the right product for you.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "How big is the tray?", "answer": "The maker gives the size as about 25 x 19 x 5 cm. That is a footprint of about 25 cm by 19 cm on the surface, standing 5 cm tall. It suits a chest of drawers, a bedside table or a desk corner without taking over the whole space.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "How deep is each compartment?", "answer": "The maker gives each section as 5 cm deep. One section has a curved base, which the maker says makes it good for money and coins. That depth is enough to stop coins and keys from skipping out if the surface gets knocked.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "How many compartments does it have?", "answer": "Five. As pictured there is one large open section, two small ones, one with a curved base for coins and one covered by a flap lid. Larger items like a phone or wallet have room, while smaller things like rings, coins and cufflinks sit in their own sections.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "What does it weigh?", "answer": "The maker gives the weight as 450 g.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "Black, with white stitching around the outside and a grey faux suede lining, as pictured. The maker describes the black as an easy colour to match with any room.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Is this a good valet tray for men?", "answer": "Yes. The plain black faux leather exterior and the five section layout suit a typical pocket load of keys, change, a watch and a wallet. That said, nothing about it is gendered, and it works just as well for anyone who wants a tidy landing spot.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on a desk at work?", "answer": "Yes. A desk catchall tray keeps paper clips, a phone, a pass card and loose change from spreading across the whole desk. The 25 cm by 19 cm footprint fits beside a keyboard or in a corner.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Will it fit on a bedside table?", "answer": "Most bedside tables have enough room for it, since the tray needs about 25 cm by 19 cm of flat space. Measure yours first if it is a narrow or compact one. A bedside table is a sensible home for a valet tray, because it is right where you empty your pockets.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Can I use it in a car?", "answer": "The maker suggests it as a car organiser, though we would only put it somewhere flat and stable, such as a console shelf or a boot area. It is not fixed down, so it is not suited to sitting loose on a seat while driving. Treat it as storage for a parked car rather than something that travels full.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Does it hold a phone?", "answer": "Yes. The maker lists a phone, a wallet and sunglasses among the things it is meant for, and the large open compartment is the place for them. Very large phone and case combinations may sit a little proud of the 5 cm wall, which is fine for a resting spot.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Will it hold watches safely?", "answer": "It will hold a watch, and the faux suede lining is softer against a case back than bare wood or glass. It is not a dedicated watch box with pillows or a lid, so it does not protect against dust the way a closed case would. For one or two daily watches it is a sensible home.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Is the lining soft enough for jewellery?", "answer": "The interior is finished in faux suede, which is gentler than a hard surface for rings, chains and earrings. Fine chains can still tangle if you drop several in together, so use separate compartments for them. Delicate or high value pieces are better in a lined jewellery box with a lid.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Does it have a lid?", "answer": "Not over the whole tray. As pictured, one of the five compartments is covered by a flap lid with a small pull tab, and the other four are open. The open sections let you drop things in and grab them without opening anything.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Can the compartments be removed or rearranged?", "answer": "No. The five compartments are part of the tray structure rather than loose inserts. This keeps the shape stable and means nothing shifts when you reach in.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Is it stackable?", "answer": "It is not designed to stack. The rim is a single even height and there is no interlocking edge. Use it as a single tray on a flat surface.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Wipe the faux leather outside with a soft cloth that is just slightly damp, then dry it right away. For the faux suede lining, a dry soft brush or a lint roller lifts dust and grit. Do not soak it, machine wash it or use bleach, solvents or alcohol based cleaners.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Does faux leather need conditioning like real leather?", "answer": "No. Leather conditioners are made for genuine hide and can leave a sticky or patchy film on synthetic leather. Keep it simple with a dry or barely damp cloth. That is genuinely all the maintenance it needs.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Will it scratch my furniture?", "answer": "The base is covered in faux leather rather than bare plastic or metal, so it is softer against a wooden top than a hard tray. Grit caught underneath can still mark a polished surface, so lift rather than drag it when you move it, and give the base an occasional wipe.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Can I leave it in direct sunlight?", "answer": "Long term sun exposure is not kind to synthetic leather and can dry the finish or fade it. A spot away from a sunny window is better. The same goes for radiators and other heat sources.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "What happens if something wet goes in it?", "answer": "Dry it quickly with a cloth. Faux leather handles a splash better than untreated hide, but sitting moisture is not good for any lining, especially the suede finish. Let damp keys or a wet umbrella strap dry before putting them in.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Is it heavy enough to stay put?", "answer": "At a stated 450 g it has enough weight not to slide around during normal use, and it gets heavier as soon as you put keys and coins in it. It is not bolted down, so a hard knock will still move it. On a smooth glass top you may prefer to add small felt dots underneath.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Does it come in a gift box?", "answer": "The maker lists a white hard shell box in the package along with the tray. That makes it straightforward to give as a present without needing extra packaging.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Would this make a good gift?", "answer": "It is a reliable one. A gift tray for him is a safe choice for birthdays, anniversaries, Christmas, Father's Day or a new job, because it gets used every single day rather than stored away. The plain styling means it suits most homes and most tastes.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Who is this suited to?", "answer": "Anyone who loses keys, scatters change or wants a tidier bedside table or desk. It works well for people who carry a few small items daily and want one visible spot for them. It is less suited to someone who needs a large open tray for bigger objects.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Can I use it for makeup or stationery?", "answer": "Yes. The five compartments take brushes, lipsticks, pens, paper clips and sticky notes just as easily as keys and coins. It is simply a compartment storage tray, so the contents are up to you.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "Where is it made?", "answer": "The maker lists the country of origin as China.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "How do I know it will arrive in good condition?", "answer": "The maker packs it inside the white hard shell box that comes with it, which gives the tray a rigid shell around it. If anything does arrive damaged, contact us with a photo and we will sort it out.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me when it arrives?", "answer": "Get in touch within the returns window shown at checkout and we will walk you through sending it back. Keep the white box and keep the tray clean and unused if you think you may return it, since that makes the process simple. If it is the size, the colour or just not the look you pictured, that is a perfectly fine reason to return it.", "source": "Faux Leather Valet Tray with 5 Compartments", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/leather-valet-tray-5-compartment/" }, { "question": "What is this product?", "answer": "It is a rectangular leather valet tray, sometimes called a catchall or a pocket emptier. It gives small everyday items like keys, coins and a watch one fixed place to sit. The maker states it is made from genuine leather and handcrafted in Italy.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What are the exact dimensions?", "answer": "The outside measures 23.5 cm long by 15 cm wide by 4 cm high. The inside well measures 21 cm long by 11.5 cm wide by 3 cm deep. That gap between outer and inner is the thickness of the leather walls and base.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What is it made from?", "answer": "Genuine leather, as stated by the maker. Leather gives the tray a soft surface that is kinder to watch cases and jewellery than glass or metal.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Where is it made?", "answer": "The maker states it is handcrafted in Italy by Tuscan artisans.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "Red and black. As pictured, the outside and the base of the well are red, the inner walls are black, and pale stitching runs around the edges. We sell this tray in red and black only.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Will a watch fit in it?", "answer": "Yes. With a 21 x 11.5 cm inner floor, a standard wristwatch lies flat with plenty of room beside it. Larger diver-style watches also fit comfortably, which is why this works well as a leather watch tray.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "How many sets of keys can it hold?", "answer": "Realistically two or three sets alongside other small items, depending on how bulky your fobs are. The 3 cm inner depth keeps them below the rim so nothing hangs over the edge. If your household has four or more sets, consider a second tray by the door.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is it deep enough for coins?", "answer": "Yes. A 3 cm well holds a sizeable handful of change without anything spilling. Coins also sit quietly in leather rather than rattling, which matters on a bedside table.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Can I use it for jewellery?", "answer": "It works well as a leather jewellery tray for rings, stud earrings, bracelets and a necklace or two. It is one open well with no dividers, so fine chains can tangle if you pile them in together. A small pouch inside the tray solves that if you have delicate pieces.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What does the inside look like?", "answer": "As pictured, the base of the well is a red leather panel and the inner walls are black, both with a pebbled grain. The well measures 21 x 11.5 x 3 cm.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Where should I put it?", "answer": "Common spots are a desk, a bedside table, a hallway console, a coffee table or a dressing table. The hallway placement is the most useful for anyone who regularly misplaces keys. At 4 cm tall it sits low enough not to block anything behind it.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Will it slide around on a glossy surface?", "answer": "Leather has more grip than glass or polished metal, so it tends to stay put on a desk or a console. On a very slick lacquered surface you may notice slight movement when you drop keys in hard. A small felt pad under each corner fixes that if it bothers you.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "How are the corners held?", "answer": "As pictured, each corner is drawn together and fastened with a metal press stud, which is what lifts the sides into a tray. Pale contrast stitching finishes the rim.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Can it sit on a coffee table?", "answer": "Yes. The maker suggests a desk, a bedside table or a coffee table. At 23.5 x 15 cm it holds keys, coins and reading glasses without taking over the table top.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable as a gift?", "answer": "Very much so. There is no size to guess, no setup and no styling that leans male or female, so it suits birthdays, Christmas, retirements and housewarmings. A leather gift for men and women that is actually used daily is rarer than it sounds.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Does it have compartments?", "answer": "No. It is a single open well, 21 cm long by 11.5 cm wide and 3 cm deep. Everything sits together, which keeps it quick to use.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Wipe it with a dry or barely damp soft cloth and let it air dry naturally. Skip household sprays, solvents and anything abrasive, as these can mark or dry out leather. For dust in the corners, a soft dry brush works well.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Can I condition the leather?", "answer": "Yes, sparingly. A small amount of leather conditioner applied with a soft cloth every six to twelve months helps keep the hide supple. Always test on a hidden spot first, since conditioners can slightly deepen colour.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What happens if it gets wet?", "answer": "Blot the moisture with a dry cloth straight away and let it dry at room temperature. Do not use a radiator or hairdryer, as fast heat makes leather stiff. A small water mark often fades as the piece dries evenly.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Will the colour fade?", "answer": "Long spells in direct sunlight can lighten leather over time, as with most dyed hides. Keeping the tray off a sunny windowsill is the simplest precaution. Normal indoor light is not a problem.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Will it scratch?", "answer": "Leather is forgiving but not scratch-proof. Keys and watch buckles may leave faint marks over time, which many owners see as character rather than damage. If you want to minimise it, drop sharp-edged items in rather than dragging them across the base.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is it big enough for a phone?", "answer": "Most standard smartphones fit within the 21 x 11.5 cm inner floor, though a large phone in a bulky case will fill most of the tray. If the tray's main job is phone plus keys plus watch, expect it to be full. You may prefer to keep the phone alongside rather than inside.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on a bathroom shelf?", "answer": "It is better suited to dry rooms. Bathrooms get steam and splashes, and repeated damp is not kind to leather. A bedroom or dressing table is a safer home for a small leather storage tray.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Does it stack with other trays?", "answer": "It is not designed to stack or nest. Two trays side by side work well if you want to separate work items from personal ones.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for an office desk?", "answer": "Yes. As an Italian leather desk tray it holds paper clips, a memory stick, a spare pen, lip balm and the ring you take off before typing. The low 4 cm profile keeps it from crowding a keyboard. Being rectangular, it tucks against a monitor stand neatly.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is the stitching visible?", "answer": "Yes. As pictured, pale contrast stitching runs around the rim and around the red base panel. It stands out against both the black and the red.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Will it smell of leather?", "answer": "New genuine leather often has a noticeable natural scent that softens over the first few weeks. Airing it in a ventilated room speeds that along. The smell is a normal property of the material, not a fault.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "How does it compare with a wooden or ceramic tray?", "answer": "Ceramic and glass are harder, so dropped keys clatter and watch cases can pick up scuffs. Wood is quieter but shows scratches along the grain. Leather sits in between, soft on contents and more forgiving of daily knocks.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "How is it delivered and can I return it?", "answer": "Delivery and returns follow the standard terms shown at checkout for your country storefront. Keep the packaging until you are sure you are keeping the tray.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me?", "answer": "If the size or colour does not suit your space once it arrives, use the returns process listed at checkout within the stated window, with the item unused and in its original packaging. It is worth measuring your intended surface against the 23.5 x 15 cm footprint first, since that is the most common reason a tray gets sent back. If you are unsure which spot suits it, set it down for a day or two in each location before deciding.", "source": "Rectangular Italian Leather Valet Tray Organiser", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rectangular-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What exactly is this product?", "answer": "It is a slim leather card holder, sometimes called a minimalist wallet or card case. It carries cards in six slots and has a central pocket for folded notes or receipts. It is designed to replace a bulky bifold wallet for everyday use.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "What is it made from?", "answer": "Genuine leather, as stated by the maker. It is black with a pebbled grain and black stitching, as pictured.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "How many cards does it hold?", "answer": "There are six card slots, three on each side. Each slot holds one to two cards depending on thickness, so the practical range is roughly six to twelve cards. Embossed bank cards usually sit one per slot.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "How thick is it?", "answer": "About 0.2 cm when empty. Filling the slots will add some thickness, as it would with any card holder. Even loaded it stays far slimmer than a traditional folding wallet.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "How much does it weigh?", "answer": "Roughly 20 g, going by the maker's figure. That is light enough that you soon stop noticing it in a pocket.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Does it block RFID?", "answer": "The maker states it has double-layer RFID blocking to help prevent unauthorised scanning of contactless cards and ID. This is a built-in part of the construction rather than a removable sleeve.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Will the RFID blocking stop my card working at a payment terminal?", "answer": "You take the card out of the slot to tap it, and at that point it reads normally. The shielding is only meant to work while the card sits inside the holder.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Can it hold cash?", "answer": "Yes, in the centre compartment. Folded notes sit there alongside a receipt or two. It is not a billfold, so a thick wad of cash is not what this design is for.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Can it hold coins?", "answer": "A few coins can go in the central compartment, but it has no zip or press stud, so they are not fully secured. If you handle coins daily, a separate coin pouch is the better pairing.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Is this a good choice for a front pocket?", "answer": "Yes. The flat profile of about 0.2 cm is what makes it work there. It sits along the pocket seam rather than bulging outward, and the maker says it fits a front or back pocket without adding bulk.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Will it fit in a suit jacket?", "answer": "Yes. The thin profile means it does not break the line of a jacket or create a visible lump. It is a sensible pick if you want a slim card holder for a suit rather than a thick leather fold.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for women as well as men?", "answer": "Yes. The maker presents it as a gift for men, but the plain black design is not gendered, and it works just as well inside a handbag as it does in a trouser pocket. It also works as a second card holder inside a larger bag.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "Black, inside and out, as pictured. We sell it in black and in one size.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "What are the external dimensions?", "answer": "About 10.5 cm wide and 8 cm tall, as shown in the maker's size picture, and about 0.2 cm thick when empty. That is a little larger than a bank card, which is 8.56 cm by 5.4 cm.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Will my driving licence fit?", "answer": "A UK photocard driving licence is the same size as a bank card, so it fits the slots. Paper documents and folded sheets will not. If your licence is larger than a bank card, measure before ordering.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Can I keep a hotel key card in it?", "answer": "Yes, hotel key cards are standard card size and fit the slots. Keep in mind that the RFID shielding may interfere with reading the key while it is inside, so take it out before you tap the door.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Is it good for travel?", "answer": "It works well as a card holder for travel because it is small and light. You can carry it with a couple of payment cards and some local notes, leaving the main wallet in a hotel safe. It also slips inside a passport pouch easily.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Does it have a money clip?", "answer": "No. This is a card holder with six card slots and a centre pocket, not a money clip wallet. Folded notes sit in the centre pocket and stay in place through friction from the leather. If you specifically want a metal clip, this is not that design.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Will the slots stretch over time?", "answer": "Leather does relax with use, which generally makes cards easier to slide in and out after the first few weeks. Overloading slots with three or more cards each speeds up stretching, so stick to one or two per slot to keep the fit snug.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "How do I break it in?", "answer": "Load it with the cards you plan to carry and use it normally. For the first week, slide cards in and out a few times a day to soften the slots. It eases quickly without any special treatment.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Wipe with a soft dry cloth for dust. For marks use a barely damp cloth, then let it dry naturally away from radiators or direct sun. Do not machine wash it or use solvent cleaners.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Can I condition the leather?", "answer": "Yes. A small amount of leather balm made for smooth leather, applied sparingly with a cloth and buffed off, helps keep it supple. Do this a few times a year rather than monthly, and test on a small area first.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "What if it gets wet?", "answer": "Blot the surface with a dry cloth and let it dry at room temperature. Keep it away from direct heat, which can stiffen or crack leather. Remove the cards first so the holder can dry evenly.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Is it suited to daily use?", "answer": "It is made for daily carry of a small card set. The simple construction means there are no zips or clasps to fail. Sensible loading matters more than anything else: one or two cards per slot, as the maker advises.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Does it have a brand logo on the outside?", "answer": "As pictured, there is a small embossed mark in one corner of the front. There is no printed logo, metal badge or contrast stitching.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Is it a good gift?", "answer": "It is one of the easier gift choices for a man who carries too much, and it works for birthdays, Father's Day, Christmas and graduations. The plain black finish suits almost any taste. It is also compact enough to post without fuss.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "How does it compare to a bifold wallet?", "answer": "A bifold holds more and is thicker once filled. This card holder deliberately caps what you can carry, which keeps it flat. Choose it if you are happy to carry fewer cards and little cash.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "Can I use it with a phone case that has card slots?", "answer": "Yes. You can keep payment cards in the holder and one backup card in the phone case. Storing them in separate pockets means you are less likely to lose both at once.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "What is the delivery and returns position?", "answer": "Delivery and returns follow the store policy shown on this site, since terms vary by country. Check the policy page linked in the site footer before ordering.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me?", "answer": "If the size, capacity or finish does not suit you, follow the returns process on the store policy page for the country you ordered from. Keep the packaging and leave the card holder unused until you decide. If you simply need more capacity, a bifold or a larger card case is the better fit, and this one still makes a tidy travel spare.", "source": "Slim Leather Card Holder with RFID Blocking", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/slim-leather-card-holder/" }, { "question": "What exactly is this product?", "answer": "It is a square leather tray, sometimes called a valet tray or catch-all. It sits on a flat surface and holds small everyday items like keys, coins, a watch or rings so they are all in one place.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What is it made from?", "answer": "Genuine leather. The maker states it is made in Italy and describes it as handmade.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "How big is it?", "answer": "The maker gives two sets of figures. The inner well is 13 cm by 13 cm and 4 cm deep. The outside, across the flared edges, is 19 cm by 19 cm and 4.5 cm high. Allow for the 19 cm figure when you measure your bedside table or desk corner.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "Taupe. It is a warm, muted neutral that sits between grey and light brown. As pictured, the base panel and outside are taupe, the inner walls are a dark brown, and the stitching is pale.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is it handmade?", "answer": "Yes, the maker describes the tray as handmade. Small variations in stitching, edge finish and grain are normal with handmade leather goods and are part of the character.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Will it hold a phone?", "answer": "Not flat. The inner well is 13 cm square, and most phones are longer than that, so a phone rests at an angle against the sides. The tray is mainly for keys, coins and jewellery rather than a phone.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Can I use it for jewellery?", "answer": "It works well for rings, earrings, bracelets and cufflinks. The raised sides stop small pieces rolling away, which is the main reason people look for a leather jewellery tray in the first place.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for a desk?", "answer": "Yes. As a genuine leather desk organiser it holds paper clips, a USB stick, a pen or two and your keys without taking up much workspace.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Would it work in a hallway?", "answer": "Yes. A leather hallway tray by the front door gives keys and the car fob a fixed home, which cuts down on the morning search.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What does the inside look like?", "answer": "As pictured, the base is a taupe leather panel with a pebbled grain and a small embossed stamp in the centre. The inner walls are a dark brown leather, and pale stitching frames the base.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What are the inside measurements?", "answer": "The maker gives the inner well as 13 cm by 13 cm and 4 cm deep. That is the space you actually fill, so use those figures when you think about what will go in it.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is it rigid or soft?", "answer": "The sides stand up on their own so contents stay put. It is still leather, so it has some give under a thumb.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "How are the corners held?", "answer": "As pictured, each corner is drawn together and fastened with a metal press stud, which is what lifts the sides into a tray. The corners flare out slightly, which is why the outside measures 19 cm across.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Will it scratch my furniture?", "answer": "Leather is soft against wood and glass, which is one of its advantages over ceramic or metal. Still, grit trapped underneath can mark a polished surface, so lift it rather than sliding it when you clean.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Dust with a soft dry cloth. For marks, use a barely damp cloth and let it dry naturally away from radiators and direct sun. Do not soak it or use household cleaners.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Can I use leather conditioner on it?", "answer": "A small amount of neutral leather conditioner can help keep the hide supple. Test it on an inconspicuous spot, such as the underside, before treating the whole tray.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What happens if something spills in it?", "answer": "Blot the liquid straight away with a dry cloth rather than rubbing. Let the leather air dry at room temperature. Heat sources can stiffen or shrink leather, so avoid a hairdryer.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Will the colour fade?", "answer": "Leather can lighten over time in strong, constant sunlight. Keeping it off a sunny windowsill helps the taupe stay even. Handling tends to deepen the colour a little.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is it a good gift?", "answer": "It is one of the easier gifts to get right. The neutral colour and plain shape mean it suits most tastes, which is why a leather valet tray is such a common choice for birthdays, Father's Day and new-home presents.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is it designed for men or women?", "answer": "Both. The maker suggests it as a gift for men and women, and the taupe finish keeps it neutral enough for any dressing table or desk.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Can I buy more than one?", "answer": "Yes. Two or three used together let you separate categories, for example one for keys at the door and one for jewellery by the bed.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Does it come with anything inside, like dividers?", "answer": "No. It is a single open compartment with no dividers, which is what makes it flexible for different kinds of small items.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is it stackable?", "answer": "No. Treat it as a standalone tray rather than part of a set that stacks.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is this Italian leather?", "answer": "The maker states the tray is genuine leather and made in Italy. The tannery and the type of hide are not given.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Will it smell of leather?", "answer": "Genuine leather usually carries a natural scent when new. It softens within a few weeks of normal use and is usually mild.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Is the stitching visible?", "answer": "Yes. As pictured, pale contrast stitching runs around the rim and around the taupe base panel.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Does it have a lid?", "answer": "No. It is an open tray, so you can drop things in and pick them up with one hand.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "Where is it made?", "answer": "The maker states it is made in Italy.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "How does delivery and returns work?", "answer": "Orders are sent to the address you give at checkout, and you will get confirmation once the order is placed. If something arrives damaged or incorrect, contact us with your order number and photos and we will sort it out.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me?", "answer": "Get in touch and we will walk you through the return. Keep the tray unused and in its packaging if you can, since that makes the process quicker, and tell us whether you want a refund or a different item.", "source": "Square Leather Tray Organiser in Taupe Italian Leather", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/square-leather-tray-organiser/" }, { "question": "What exactly comes in the pack?", "answer": "Two cushion covers, both plain light brown and both 50 x 50 cm. No cushion inserts or pads are included. You use your own existing inserts or buy them separately.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Is this real linen?", "answer": "No. The fabric is polyester woven to look like linen, which the maker describes as polyester linen. No linen percentage is stated, so treat it as a linen look rather than a pure linen cloth.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Why choose a linen look instead of pure linen?", "answer": "A polyester weave gives you a textured, matt appearance without the heavy creasing of pure linen, and it washes in the machine on a cold cycle. If you want the look more than the fibre, a linen look cover is a practical choice.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What size cushion insert should I use?", "answer": "A 50 x 50 cm insert fits as intended. For a fuller, plumper cushion, go one size up to 55 x 55 cm and the corners will fill out neatly instead of sagging.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Will a 45 cm insert work?", "answer": "It will fit, but the cover will look loose and the corners will flop. If 45 cm pads are all you have, the cushions will still work, they just read softer and flatter than intended.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "How accurate is the 50 x 50 cm measurement?", "answer": "Allow 1 to 2 cm either way. The maker says the covers are cut and sewn by hand, so small variations between covers are normal.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What type of zip is it?", "answer": "A hidden zip set into the seam. It keeps the front panel plain and uninterrupted, which is part of why these work well as plain cushion covers in a minimal room.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I machine wash them?", "answer": "Yes. Wash cold on a gentle cycle with similar colours. Take the inserts out first and close the zip before the covers go in the drum.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry them?", "answer": "Tumble dry on low if you need to. Line drying in the shade is kinder to the weave and avoids any risk of heat setting creases.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Should I iron them?", "answer": "Ironing is not needed and is best avoided. The slight texture of the weave is part of the look, and heat can flatten it. If a cover is very creased from packaging, a short low tumble or a hang in a steamy bathroom usually sorts it.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Do they need bleach for stains?", "answer": "No bleach. Spot treat with a mild detergent and cool water, then wash the whole cover so the colour stays even.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What colour is light brown exactly?", "answer": "A warm tan brown with lighter threads woven through, closer to toast or caramel than chocolate. Screens vary, so the shade you see on your monitor may read slightly warmer or cooler than the cloth in person.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What colours go with light brown cushions?", "answer": "Cream, oatmeal, warm grey, olive green, rust and natural oak all pair well. Brown is a forgiving neutral because it sits between beige and black on most palettes.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Will these suit a grey sofa?", "answer": "Yes, and it is one of the better uses for them. Light brown adds warmth to cool grey upholstery without clashing.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Are they suitable for a bed?", "answer": "Yes. A pair of 50 cm squares sits well in front of standard pillows and adds a layer of texture to the top of a bed.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I use them outdoors?", "answer": "The maker lists patios and porches among the places they suit. They are not described as weatherproof or UV treated, so use them in dry weather, bring them in before rain and store them inside over winter.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Are they soft to the touch?", "answer": "The maker describes the covers as soft to touch and comfortable to lean on. The surface is a textured, slightly chunky weave, so it feels like cloth rather than a slick synthetic.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Do they shed or pill?", "answer": "Washing cold on a gentle cycle and keeping rough zips or velcro out of the same load helps keep the woven surface smooth. Close the zip on each cover before it goes in the drum.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Will they shrink?", "answer": "Follow the maker's care instructions: a cold machine wash on a gentle cycle, at no more than 30°C, and a low tumble dry if needed. Avoid hot washes and high heat.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Are they practical in a home with pets?", "answer": "They are ordinary washable covers, so pet hair brushes off and the whole cover goes in the machine when needed. Claws can snag any woven fabric, so a cat that kneads cushions will eventually pull threads.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I mix these with patterned cushions?", "answer": "Yes. Two plain light brown covers calm down a patterned pair and keep a sofa from looking busy, and the texture of the weave stops the plain pair looking flat.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "How many cushions should go on a sofa?", "answer": "Two on a two-seater, three or four on a three-seater, with an odd number often looking more relaxed. A pair of these can cover a small sofa on their own or form half of a larger group.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Do I need to buy two packs?", "answer": "Only if you want four matching covers. For a three-seat sofa, one pack plus a contrasting pair is a common and easy-looking combination.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Can I use these on a reading chair or armchair?", "answer": "Yes. A single 50 cm square works well as a back or side cushion in an armchair or reading chair.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Are they suitable for a rental or shared home?", "answer": "Very much so. Swapping covers is one of the cheapest ways to change a room you cannot repaint, without committing to new furniture.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Can they be dry cleaned?", "answer": "No. The maker's care instructions say do not dry clean, do not bleach and do not iron. Machine wash on a gentle cycle at no more than 30°C, and tumble dry low if needed.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "How does delivery work?", "answer": "Delivery options are shown during checkout for your country before you confirm your order.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What if the covers arrive creased?", "answer": "Creasing from flat packing is normal. Hang them for a day, or give them a short low tumble, and the weave settles back on its own.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "Do these make a good gift?", "answer": "They do, especially for housewarmings. A neutral pair is low risk because light brown works with most existing furniture, and the recipient can use the inserts they already have.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What if they are not right when they arrive?", "answer": "If the colour does not work with your room or the fit is not what you expected, contact our team and we will walk you through the returns process. Keep the covers unwashed and in their original packaging while you decide, as that makes a return much easier to process.", "source": "Light Brown Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm (Pack of 2)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/light-brown-linen-cushion-covers-50-cm/" }, { "question": "What exactly do I get?", "answer": "You get one cover measuring 50 x 70 cm, in petrol blue. It is a single cover, and the insert or pillow is not included. Order two if you want a matching pair.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "What is the cover made from?", "answer": "It is made from 100% linen that has been washed and softened by stonewashing, as stated by the maker. Linen is woven from flax, a plant fibre. The maker lists no other fibre in the cloth.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "What does stonewashed mean?", "answer": "Stonewashing is a finishing wash given to the linen before it is sold. It softens the fibre and relaxes the weave, so the cover feels broken in from the first day. It also gives the gently crumpled look that washed linen is known for.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "What colour is petrol blue?", "answer": "Petrol blue is a deep blue with a touch of green in it. It is darker and quieter than a bright teal, and warmer than navy. Like any deep colour, it can look greener or bluer depending on the light in the room.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Is the cover plain or patterned?", "answer": "It is a solid colour. There is no print, stripe or woven pattern, so the texture of the linen is the only detail on the surface.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "What size insert do I need?", "answer": "A 50 x 70 cm insert or pillow is the match, which is about 20 x 28 inches. Measure the one you plan to use from seam to seam before you order.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Will a standard UK pillow fit inside?", "answer": "It would be a squeeze. A standard UK pillow is usually about 50 x 75 cm, which is 5 cm longer than this cover. For a clean fit, use a pillow or pad that measures 50 x 70 cm.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Is an insert included?", "answer": "No. This is the cover only. Selling it that way lets you use a pad you already own or choose the filling you prefer.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Is it a pillowcase or a cushion cover?", "answer": "It can be either. The maker lists it as a pillowcase, and at 50 x 70 cm it also works as a rectangular cushion cover on a bed or sofa. What you put inside decides which one it is.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "How do I wash it?", "answer": "The maker states it is machine washable at 40°C. Wash it with similar colours and use a mild detergent. Turning it inside out first helps protect the colour.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Should I wash it before the first use?", "answer": "It is a sensible habit with any bedding or cushion cover. A first wash freshens the fabric after packing and storage. It also shows you how the linen behaves in your own machine.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Will the linen shrink?", "answer": "This linen has already been washed and softened by the maker, which settles the cloth. Linen can still tighten slightly in a hot wash or a hot dryer. Staying at the stated 40°C keeps any change small.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry it?", "answer": "The maker's care notes cover machine washing at 40°C and ironing. Line drying is the cautious choice and is gentle on the colour. If you do use a dryer, keep the heat low and take the cover out while it is slightly damp.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Do I need to iron it?", "answer": "No. Stonewashed linen is meant to look softly creased. If you prefer a smoother finish, the maker describes the cover as easy to iron, and pressing it while slightly damp gives the neatest result.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Should I use fabric softener?", "answer": "It is better to leave it out. Softener coats the fibres and can leave linen feeling slightly waxy. Washing softens linen without any help.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Will the colour fade?", "answer": "Any dyed natural fabric can lighten over years of washing and strong sun. Washing the cover inside out and drying it out of direct sunlight slows that down. If it lives in a bright window, turn it now and then.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Should I wash it separately at first?", "answer": "With any deep colour, it is sensible to wash it with dark or similar colours for the first few washes. Keep it away from white bedding in the machine until you have seen how it behaves.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Where is it made?", "answer": "The maker states the cover is made in the EU.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Will it get softer with use?", "answer": "Usually, yes. Linen tends to soften as it is washed and handled, and the stonewashing has already given this cover a head start.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "How would I use it on a bed?", "answer": "You can sleep on it as a pillowcase if your pillow is 50 x 70 cm. Many people use it as an accent instead, with one petrol blue pillow in front of plain white or off white ones. A single deep colour is often enough to lift a plain bed.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Does it work on a sofa?", "answer": "Yes. A 50 x 70 cm rectangle makes a generous sofa cushion that supports your back and shoulders. It also breaks up a row of square cushions, which can look a little uniform.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Is it sold as a pair?", "answer": "No, this is a single cover. Order one for each insert you want to cover. If you are buying two, ordering them together gives the closest match in shade.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "What colours go with petrol blue?", "answer": "It sits well with white, off white, natural linen and soft grey. For warmth, try it beside ochre, rust or tan leather. It also looks good against oak and walnut.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Does petrol blue show marks?", "answer": "A deep colour hides small everyday marks better than a pale one. Lint, dust and pet hair can show up more against a dark cloth. A quick shake or a lint roller deals with those between washes.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "How does linen compare with cotton for cushion covers?", "answer": "Cotton is smoother and holds a flat, pressed look. Linen has more texture, a slight slub in the yarn and a relaxed drape. Choose linen if you like a soft, natural finish and do not mind creases.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Does linen crease?", "answer": "Yes, and stonewashed linen is meant to. The creases are soft and irregular, which is the look people buy washed linen for. On a deep colour like this they read as texture.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Is linen only for summer?", "answer": "No. Linen breathes well in warm weather, and a deep colour like petrol blue feels just as at home in the colder months. Most people leave linen cushions out all year.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "Does it make a good gift?", "answer": "It can, especially for someone who likes plain, natural fabrics. Since the insert is not included, tell the person receiving it, or add a 50 x 70 cm pad to the present.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "How should I store it when it is not in use?", "answer": "Make sure it is fully dry, fold it loosely and keep it somewhere dry and out of direct sunlight. A shelf or a cloth bag suits linen better than a sealed plastic box.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right when it arrives?", "answer": "Contact us and we will talk you through the returns process. Keep the cover unwashed and in its original packaging if you think you may send it back. Tell us what was wrong, whether that is the shade of blue, the size or the feel.", "source": "Pure Linen Cushion Cover 50 x 70 cm, Petrol Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-50-x-70-petrol-blue/" }, { "question": "What exactly am I buying here?", "answer": "You are buying one cushion cover measuring 40 x 60 cm in yellow. It is a cover only, so no cushion pad or insert is included. The cover closes with a hidden zip.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Is this cover made from real linen?", "answer": "No. The fabric is polyester fibre woven to give a linen look, as stated by the maker. It copies the texture and matt finish of linen but it is a synthetic yarn, not flax.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Why would I choose a linen look fabric over real linen?", "answer": "A polyester linen look weave gives the textured, matt appearance of linen, creases less than flax and can be machine washed cold on a gentle cycle. That makes it a practical choice for rooms that get daily use.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "What size insert should I use?", "answer": "A 40 x 60 cm insert is the straight match. If you prefer a fuller, rounder cushion with no slack at the corners, go one size larger so the filling pushes gently into the seams.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Is an insert included?", "answer": "No, the insert is not included. You receive the cover on its own, which is why it costs less than a filled cushion.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "How many covers come in the pack?", "answer": "One. This is a single cover, so if you want a matching pair on a sofa you would need to order two.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "What shape is 40 x 60 cm?", "answer": "It is a rectangle, often called a lumbar or oblong cushion size. It sits lengthways across a sofa seat or in front of bed pillows, behind the small of the back.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Will the yellow match the photos exactly?", "answer": "Colour can look different under different lighting and on different screens, as the maker notes. Expect a close match rather than a perfect one, and view it in daylight once it arrives.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Can I machine wash it?", "answer": "Yes. Wash cold on a gentle cycle with similar colours. Do not bleach and do not iron.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Should I remove the insert before washing?", "answer": "Always. Take the pad out, close the zip, then wash the cover on its own. Washing a filled cushion can leave the filling lumpy and slow to dry.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "How should I dry it?", "answer": "The maker's advice is to hang it to dry. Reshape the cover while it is still damp so the seams sit square as it dries.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry it?", "answer": "The maker's advice is to hang the cover to dry, so air drying is the route to follow. High heat can flatten the texture that gives the fabric its linen look.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Is ironing allowed?", "answer": "No. The care advice is do not iron. If the cover looks creased out of the wash, smooth it by hand while damp and let it dry flat or hanging.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "What is the hidden zip for?", "answer": "It lets you fit and remove the insert while keeping the closure out of sight. A concealed zip keeps the face of the cushion looking like one clean panel, which matters on a plain fabric.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Which way should the zip face once it is on the sofa?", "answer": "Most people turn the zip to the bottom edge or towards the back of the seat. That keeps it out of the way and hides it completely.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Will the size be exactly 40 x 60 cm?", "answer": "Allow 1 to 2 cm variation, as the maker advises, because the covers are hand cut and sewn.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for a bed?", "answer": "Yes. A 40 x 60 cm rectangle is a common choice as a front cushion on a double or king bed, sitting in front of the sleeping pillows. It works as a bedroom accent rather than a pillow you sleep on.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on an office chair?", "answer": "Yes, the maker lists the office among the places it suits. A 40 x 60 cm cover with a soft insert sits across the back of a desk chair without taking up seat space.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for outdoor use?", "answer": "The maker lists backyards and balconies among the places it suits, alongside sofas, beds, lounges and offices. It is not described as weatherproof, so use it in dry weather and bring it indoors afterwards.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Is the cover plain or patterned?", "answer": "It is plain yellow with no print. The interest comes from the weave, which has a visible, slightly chunky texture across the whole face.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Will it work with a feather insert?", "answer": "Yes. Feather pads give a softer, more relaxed look that dips slightly in the middle. Fibre pads hold a firmer, squarer shape. Both fit a 40 x 60 cm cover.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Can I mix it with other cushions?", "answer": "That is where a single plain cover earns its place. Pair the yellow rectangle with two square patterned cushions, or set it against neutrals for contrast. One bold colour in a group of three or five usually reads best.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "What rooms does yellow suit?", "answer": "Yellow lifts grey, navy, white and natural timber. It is a good pick for a living room that leans neutral, a reading corner, or a guest bedroom that needs some warmth.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "How often should I wash it?", "answer": "For a cushion in daily use, every month or two is reasonable. A cushion on a spare bed or a formal chair can go much longer. Spot clean small marks straight away with cold water.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Will the colour fade?", "answer": "Cold washing and drying out of direct sun are the usual ways to keep a coloured cover looking even. Follow the maker's care advice: gentle cycle, cold water, no bleach.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Does the fabric pill?", "answer": "Washing with rough items such as towels or open zips is the main thing that causes surface fuzz on a woven cover. Wash it with similar fabrics on a gentle cycle and close the zip first.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Does it make a good gift?", "answer": "A single cover is a low risk gift for someone moving house or redoing a room, especially as part of a small bundle with an insert. Choose it where you know the colour scheme, since yellow is a definite accent rather than a neutral.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "Will it be creased when I unpack it?", "answer": "Expect some creases from folding. Do not iron the cover. A cold wash or a few days on a filled insert will usually relax them.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "What is the delivery and returns position?", "answer": "Delivery and returns terms are shown at checkout for your country. Keep the cover in its original condition and packaging while you decide whether it suits the room.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right when it arrives?", "answer": "If the colour clashes, the size does not suit the sofa or you simply changed your mind, contact us through the store with your order number and we will walk you through the returns process.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Cover Single 40 x 60 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-cover-single/" }, { "question": "What exactly am I buying here?", "answer": "Two cushion covers, each 45 x 45 cm, in a plain cream linen-look fabric. Inserts are not included, so you will need cushion pads to go inside them. They are designed to refresh pads you already own.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Are these covers made of real linen?", "answer": "No. The fabric is polyester woven to look like linen, and the maker calls it polyester linen. No linen percentage is stated, so treat it as a linen-effect weave rather than genuine flax fibre.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Why choose a linen look rather than real linen?", "answer": "Polyester creases less than flax and takes a cold machine wash without much fuss. You get the matt, slightly textured appearance people like from linen cushions with less upkeep.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What size cushion pad should I use?", "answer": "A 45 x 45 cm pad is the direct match. If you want a plumper, more filled look, a 50 x 50 cm pad squeezed into a 45 cm cover gives a fuller shape with no corner sag.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Will they fit a 40 cm pad?", "answer": "They will go on, but the cover will look loose and the corners will flop. Stay at 45 cm or go slightly larger on the pad.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "How does the cover close?", "answer": "There is a hidden zip set into one seam. It keeps the front face of the cushion clean and plain, with no visible fastening or buttons.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Is the zip easy to use?", "answer": "Yes, it works like a normal garment zip. Open it fully before inserting the pad, push the corners of the pad into the corners of the cover first, then close it.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What colour are they?", "answer": "Cream. It is a soft neutral that works against grey, navy, olive, charcoal, tan and natural wood, which makes cream cushion covers 45x45 an easy starting point in a living room.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Is there a pattern or print?", "answer": "No. The covers are plain. The only visual interest comes from the woven texture of the fabric itself.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can I wash them?", "answer": "Yes. The maker's instruction is to machine wash in cold water. Remove the pad first, close the zip and wash with similar colours.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can they go in the tumble dryer?", "answer": "The maker gives one care instruction, which is to machine wash in cold water, and says nothing about tumble drying. Line drying or drying flat is the cautious choice.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Do they need ironing?", "answer": "Usually not. Reshape the covers while damp and let them dry flat or on a line. The maker gives no ironing instruction, so avoid direct heat on the fabric.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "How many covers come in a set?", "answer": "Two. Buying a set of 2 cushion covers means a sofa or bed looks intentional rather than lopsided, and you can buy two sets if you need four.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Are the two covers identical?", "answer": "Yes, both are the same plain cream colour and the same 45 x 45 cm size.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Why is there a size tolerance mentioned?", "answer": "The maker allows 1 to 2 cm deviation because the covers are cut and sewn by hand.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Will they work on a bed as well as a sofa?", "answer": "Yes. Square 45 cm cushions are a common size for layering in front of bed pillows, and neutral bedroom cushion covers tend to work with most duvet sets.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can I use them on an office or desk chair?", "answer": "Yes, the maker lists the office among the places they suit. A 45 cm cushion softens a hard chair, and the cover can be washed when it picks up marks.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Are they suitable for outdoor use?", "answer": "The maker lists patios and porches among the places they suit. They are not described as weatherproof, so use them in dry weather and bring them inside rather than leaving them exposed to rain or strong sun.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Is the fabric soft or scratchy?", "answer": "It has a woven texture rather than a smooth satin finish, so you can feel the weave. Most people find it pleasant to lean against, though it is a decorative fabric rather than a brushed one.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Does the colour fade?", "answer": "Washing cold and drying away from direct sunlight is the usual way to look after any dyed fabric. Cream is more forgiving than dark shades because any change is less visible.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Will they show marks easily?", "answer": "A pale cream will show a coffee splash more than a charcoal cover would. The upside is that the covers come off and go in a cold machine wash.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Do they shed or pill?", "answer": "Washing in cold water with similar fabrics, with the zip closed, is the gentlest routine for a woven cover. Keep rough items such as towels out of the same load.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can I mix these with patterned cushions?", "answer": "That is where plain neutrals earn their place. Use these as the quiet layer between bolder prints, or group two cream covers with one patterned cushion in the middle.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "How many cushions should I put on a three seater sofa?", "answer": "Three to five usually looks right. Two of these at the outer corners plus one contrasting cushion in the centre is a simple arrangement that works.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Are inserts sold separately?", "answer": "Yes, pads are not included with this set. Any standard 45 x 45 cm cushion pad, feather or hollowfibre, will fit.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Feather or hollowfibre pad, which is better?", "answer": "Feather pads give a soft, relaxed slouch and need a quick plump each day. Hollowfibre holds a firmer shape with less attention. Both work inside these covers.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Will they be creased when I unpack them?", "answer": "Some creases from folding are likely. They usually drop out within a day or two once the pads are in.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Do the covers have piping or trim?", "answer": "No. In the photographs the covers have plain seamed edges, with no piping, tassels or buttons. The zip is hidden in one seam.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Where does the maker suggest using them?", "answer": "On a sofa or bed, around the home, in an office, and on a patio or porch.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What if they are not right when they arrive?", "answer": "Check the size against your pads and the shade against your room in daylight before using them. If they are not right, contact us with your order number and we will talk you through the return options.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 45 cm, Cream, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-45-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What exactly am I buying here?", "answer": "You are buying two cushion covers, each 50 x 50 cm, in blue. Cushion pads or inserts are not included, so you will need to supply your own if you do not already have them.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Is this real linen?", "answer": "No. The fabric is polyester woven to look like linen, which the maker describes as polyester linen. No linen percentage is stated, so treat it as a textured polyester rather than a natural linen cloth.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Why choose a linen look fabric over actual linen?", "answer": "Polyester woven in a linen style creases less than flax and washes in cold water in the machine. Real linen has a different hand feel and tends to crumple more, which some people love and others do not. A linen look cover gives you the texture with less upkeep.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What size are the covers?", "answer": "Each cover measures 50 x 50 cm. Because they are hand cut and sewn, allow a variation of 1 to 2 cm in either direction.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What size inserts should I buy?", "answer": "A 50 x 50 cm insert is the standard match. If you want a fuller, plumper cushion, some people go one size up to 55 x 55 cm so the cover sits taut rather than slack.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "How many covers come in the set?", "answer": "Two. That is enough for a pair at either end of a sofa, or to split between two chairs.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What colour are they?", "answer": "Blue. It is a muted, slightly dusky blue in the photographs. The covers are plain with no print, so the surface interest comes from the texture of the weave.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Will blue work with my existing furniture?", "answer": "Blue is one of the easier colours to place. It sits well with grey, cream, white, natural wood and most neutral sofas. If your room is already busy, a plain blue square is a calming addition.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "How does the cover close?", "answer": "With a hidden zip along one edge. The closure is tucked away so the front of the cushion stays plain.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Is the zip easy to use?", "answer": "Yes, a hidden zip opens and closes like any standard zip, it is just concealed in the seam. Open it fully before pushing an insert in, and the pad will go in with far less wrestling.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can I machine wash these?", "answer": "Yes. The maker's instruction is to machine wash in cold water. Wash with similar colours and close the zip first so the teeth do not catch on other items.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry them?", "answer": "The maker gives one care instruction, which is to machine wash in cold water, and says nothing about tumble drying. Drying flat or on a line away from direct heat is the cautious choice.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Do they need ironing?", "answer": "Usually not much. Reshape the covers while damp and let them dry flat or on a line. The maker gives no ironing instruction, so avoid direct heat on the fabric.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Will the colour fade?", "answer": "Washing cold, avoiding bleach and keeping the cushions out of harsh direct sun will all help the blue hold up. Any fabric left in a bright window all day will shift in tone over time.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Are these suitable for a family sofa?", "answer": "They suit everyday use, mainly because the covers come off and go in the machine. For a busy household, washable covers are far more practical than a fixed cushion.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can I use them outdoors?", "answer": "The maker lists patios and porches among the places they suit. They are not described as weatherproof, so take them in rather than leaving them out in rain or damp.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Will they work on a bed?", "answer": "Yes. A pair of 50 x 50 cm squares sits nicely in front of standard pillows and adds a layer of colour without taking over the bed.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Are they good for an office chair or reading chair?", "answer": "Yes, the maker lists the office among the places they suit. A 50 cm square works as a soft backrest on a wide chair, and in a reading corner one cushion behind the lower back is enough.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Do the covers feel rough?", "answer": "The weave has a visible texture, which is the point of a linen look fabric. It is a soft textured surface rather than a smooth one, closer to a woven cotton feel than a silky finish.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can I buy just one?", "answer": "This product is sold as a set of two. If you need an odd number, buying two and using the spare elsewhere is usually the simplest route.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Will the two covers match each other?", "answer": "They are supplied as a matching pair in the same blue. Small differences in cut can occur with hand sewn items, which is why the 1 to 2 cm tolerance is noted.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Can I mix these with other cushions?", "answer": "Yes, and it usually looks better. Pair the plain blue squares with a smaller rectangle or a different texture, rather than lining up identical cushions.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "How do I stop the cushion looking flat?", "answer": "Use a well filled insert, give the cushion a firm plump with both hands, then karate chop the top edge lightly if you like that styled look. A tired old pad inside a new cover will still look tired.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What kind of insert filling is best?", "answer": "Feather and down gives the softest, most sinkable shape. Polyester fibre holds a neater form and costs less. Both work with a 50 x 50 cm cover, so it comes down to the look you want.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Is the fabric breathable?", "answer": "No breathability figure or test is given for this fabric. It is a woven polyester cloth with a visible texture.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Are inserts really not included?", "answer": "Correct, this is covers only. It is worth reading that twice before ordering, because it is the most common surprise with cover sets.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "Do they make a good gift?", "answer": "They can, particularly as a housewarming or new flat gift. Check the recipient has 50 x 50 cm pads, because inserts are not included.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "How should I store spare covers?", "answer": "Fold them flat and keep them somewhere dry and out of direct sunlight. A linen cupboard or a drawer is ideal, and they take up almost no space compared with full cushions.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What is the delivery and returns position?", "answer": "Delivery and returns terms are shown at checkout for your country. Keep the packaging until you have checked the fit on your inserts.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What if they are not right when they arrive?", "answer": "If the colour is not what you pictured or the size does not suit your pads, contact us and we will walk you through the return options. Check the fit before washing or using the covers, as that keeps the process simple.", "source": "Linen Look Cushion Covers 50 cm, Set of 2, Blue", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-cushion-covers-50-cm-set-of-2/" }, { "question": "What exactly comes in the pack?", "answer": "Two cushion covers, each 30 x 50 cm, in yellow. No pillow inserts are included, so you will need inners if you do not already have a pair the right size.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Are these covers made from pure linen?", "answer": "No. The maker lists the fabric as polyester linen, so it is a linen and polyester blend rather than pure linen. The maker does not give the fibre percentages.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Why choose a blend instead of pure linen?", "answer": "A blend keeps much of the textured linen look while being a little more relaxed about creasing. Pure linen wrinkles quickly and usually costs more.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "What size cushion pad fits these covers?", "answer": "A 30 x 50 cm lumbar pad is the direct match. Many people prefer a slightly larger inner, around 32 x 52 cm, for a fuller look with no slack at the corners.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Is 30 x 50 cm the same as 12 x 20 inches?", "answer": "Yes, 30 x 50 cm converts to roughly 12 x 20 inches. That is the standard lumbar or bolster rectangle sold in most homeware ranges.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "How does the cover close?", "answer": "There is a hidden zip set into one edge. It is designed to sit out of sight so the front face of the cushion looks unbroken when it is dressed.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Will the zip be visible when the cushion is on the sofa?", "answer": "It should not be. A concealed zip is tucked under the seam allowance, so unless you are looking for it along the edge you will not notice it from the front.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "How do I get the pad in without stretching the cover?", "answer": "Open the zip fully, fold the pad lengthways, push it into the far corners first, then let it spring open. Tugging at the zip edge is what strains the seams, so avoid that.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "What colour are they?", "answer": "Yellow, in a solid pattern with no print. It sits well against greys, soft whites, natural timber and deeper greens.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Does the shade vary in photographs?", "answer": "Yes, and in the room too. The maker notes that the surface can show a slight silvery reflection in different light and from different angles, so the yellow can look warmer or paler. That is normal for this fabric rather than a fault.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Will they suit a neutral room?", "answer": "They work well if you want one warm accent in an otherwise quiet scheme. A solid yellow lumbar pair adds colour without introducing a competing pattern.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Can I use them on a bed?", "answer": "Yes. A 30 x 50 lumbar cushion is a common finishing layer in front of sleeping pillows on a single, double or king bed. Two of them sit nicely side by side on a wider bed.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Will they work as an office chair lumbar cushion cover?", "answer": "Yes, the maker lists the office among the places they suit, provided your insert is the right size. The rectangular shape sits behind the lower back, which is why this size is popular for desk chairs.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Are they suitable for an outdoor bench?", "answer": "The maker suggests indoor places: sofas, beds, living rooms, offices and cars. Sun, damp and dew are hard on any decorative fabric, so bring them inside after use if you take them to a patio or balcony.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "How do I wash them?", "answer": "The maker gives no washing instructions for these covers. A cautious routine for a blended fabric is to close the zip and wash cool on a gentle cycle with similar colours and a mild detergent, without bleach.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Can they be tumble dried?", "answer": "The maker gives no drying instructions, so line drying in the shade is the cautious choice. Reshape the covers by hand while they are slightly damp.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Should I iron them?", "answer": "The maker gives no ironing instructions. If you do press them, use a low setting on the reverse side and test a corner first.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Will the colour run in the wash?", "answer": "Wash with similar colours the first few times as a sensible precaution with any dyed fabric. Cool water and a mild detergent reduce the risk considerably.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Do the seams fray?", "answer": "The maker states that the seams are finished with tight zigzag overlock stitches to avoid fraying.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "How often should I wash decorative cushion covers?", "answer": "Every couple of months is plenty for most living rooms. Wash sooner if the cushions are in heavy daily use.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Can I remove the covers easily for cleaning?", "answer": "Yes, that is the main benefit of a zipped cover. The pad stays dry and you only launder the fabric, which is faster and better for the inner.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Do they shrink?", "answer": "Cool washing and air drying are the cautious way to keep any blended fabric close to its original size. High heat is what causes most shrinkage problems.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Are they a good housewarming gift?", "answer": "They can be. The maker suggests them as a gift for birthdays, housewarmings and Christmas. The recipient can use them with inners they already own, and the covers are light and fold flat.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Will they match cushions I already own?", "answer": "A solid yellow lumbar pair usually sits comfortably alongside patterned or textured square cushions. Mixing one rectangle with two or four squares is a common arrangement.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "How many lumbar cushions should a sofa have?", "answer": "One on a two seater and one at each end of a three seater is a safe starting point. Having two in a pack means you can try both and keep the spare for a chair or bed.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Can I put them on a bolster pad?", "answer": "A round bolster will not sit correctly in a flat rectangular cover. Stick to a standard 30 x 50 cm rectangular pad for the right shape.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "What fill should the insert be?", "answer": "Feather or feather blend gives the softest, most relaxed drape. Polyester fibre holds a firmer, more upright shape.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Are the covers easy to store?", "answer": "Yes. The maker describes them as lightweight and easy to fold and store. Without inserts, a pair folds down small enough for a drawer.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "Where does the maker suggest using them?", "answer": "On a sofa or bed, in a living room or bedroom, in an office and in a car.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "What if they are not right once they arrive?", "answer": "Keep the covers unwashed and in their packaging, then contact us and we will talk you through the returns process for your country. If the colour or size is simply not what you pictured, that is a perfectly normal reason to send them back.", "source": "Linen Blend Lumbar Cushion Covers 30 x 50 cm (Pair, Yellow)", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-lumbar-cushion-covers-30-x-50/" }, { "question": "What exactly is included in this set?", "answer": "You receive two cushion covers, both measuring 40 x 40 cm. Cushion inserts are not included. The covers are sold as covers only so you can use pads you already own.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "What is the fabric made from?", "answer": "Each cover is made from 100% stonewashed linen, made in the EU as stated by the maker. There is no cotton blend or synthetic backing listed in this record. The whole cover, front and back, is the same linen.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "What does stonewashed actually mean?", "answer": "Stonewashing is a finishing process where the woven fabric is tumbled before it is made up into the final item. It softens the fibres and relaxes the weave, which is why the fabric feels broken in rather than stiff. It also gives the slightly crumpled look that washed linen is known for.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "What colour are the covers?", "answer": "The colour is light grey. It reads as a soft, cool neutral rather than a dark charcoal. As with all natural fibres, the exact tone can look slightly different under warm indoor light compared with daylight.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "What size cushion insert should I buy?", "answer": "A 40 x 40 cm insert is the straightforward match and gives a relaxed, softly filled cushion. If you prefer a plumper shape with filled corners, a 45 x 45 cm insert in the same cover works well. Many people buy one of each to see which look they prefer.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Why are inserts not included?", "answer": "Selling covers only keeps the price lower and avoids shipping bulky pads you may not need. Most households already have 40 cm inserts from older cushions. It also lets you choose the fill type, since feather, down and polyester all behave differently.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "How does the envelope closure work?", "answer": "The back panel is made from two overlapping pieces of linen. You push the insert through the overlap and the fabric folds back over itself to hold it in place. There is no zip, no buttons and nothing visible from the front.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Will the insert fall out of an envelope closure?", "answer": "In normal use it stays put, because the fill presses the overlap flat against itself. A properly sized insert helps here, since an undersized pad leaves slack. If you are buying for a very busy family room, a slightly larger insert will make the closure sit tighter.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Can I machine wash these covers?", "answer": "Yes. The maker states the covers can be machine washed at up to 60°C. Most people wash linen cooler than that for everyday freshening and save the hotter wash for a proper clean.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Will the linen shrink?", "answer": "Linen can tighten a little in a hot wash, which is normal for the fibre. Washing on a cooler cycle and drying on low heat keeps movement to a minimum. Pulling the cover gently back into shape while damp also helps.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry them?", "answer": "A low heat tumble is fine, and taking the covers out while slightly damp gives the softest finish. High heat is best avoided because it makes linen stiffer and sets creases hard. Line drying works just as well if you have the space.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Do I need to iron them?", "answer": "Only if you want to. The maker confirms ironing is fine, so you can press them on a warm setting for a crisper look. Left unironed, they keep the relaxed washed texture that makes these an easy set of linen cushion covers for a lived-in room.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Should I use fabric softener?", "answer": "It is better to skip it. Softener coats the fibres and can leave linen feeling slightly waxy and less absorbent. Washing is what softens linen over time, so the fabric improves on its own.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Will the covers get softer with use?", "answer": "Yes. Linen usually softens as it is washed, and the stonewashing has already given these a head start.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Are these suitable for a sofa?", "answer": "They are. A 40 cm square is the standard scatter size for most two and three seat sofas, and a pair reads as balanced at either end. Light grey cushion covers also work as a bridge between a darker sofa and lighter walls.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Can I use them on a bed?", "answer": "Yes, square 40 cm cushions are a common finishing layer at the front of a made bed. Two of them sit nicely in front of standard pillows. They are also easy to lift off at night without taking up much space.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Will they work in a child's room?", "answer": "They are fine as decorative scatter cushions in a bedroom or reading corner. Because they wash at a high temperature, they are practical for spaces that see spills. Keep in mind the covers are a light colour, so marks will show before they are washed.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Do these match other linen bedding?", "answer": "Light grey is one of the easiest neutrals to combine, so it generally sits well with white, oatmeal, stone and deeper grey linen. Tones can vary slightly between makers and dye batches. Treating it as a complementary shade rather than an exact match is the safer approach.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Is linen a summer only fabric?", "answer": "The product record makes no temperature claim. As a cushion fabric the main thing you notice year round is texture rather than temperature.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "How does linen compare to cotton for cushion covers?", "answer": "Cotton is smoother and holds a flat, pressed look. Linen has more visible texture, a slight natural slub and a relaxed drape that does not stay perfectly crisp. If you like a tidy, formal finish go with cotton, and if you like a softer lived-in look, washed linen cushions suit better.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Will the colour fade?", "answer": "Any dyed natural fibre can lighten over years of washing and strong direct sun. Washing inside out and drying out of harsh sunlight slows this down. Light grey is forgiving, since small changes in tone are hard to see.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "How does the envelope closure work?", "answer": "The back of each cover has two overlapping panels instead of a zip or buttons. You slide the insert in through the overlap and the fabric folds back over it. There is nothing to break and nothing hard to lean on.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "What does stonewashed mean?", "answer": "Stonewashing is a finishing wash that softens the linen and gives it a relaxed, slightly crumpled look before it reaches you. It is why these covers do not feel stiff when new, and why the creases are part of the look.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Where are the covers made?", "answer": "The maker states that they are made in the EU. We do not have a more exact place of manufacture than that, so we do not name one.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Can I buy more than one set?", "answer": "Yes, ordering multiple sets is a common way to kit out a full sofa or an open plan living and dining space. Natural fabrics can vary slightly between production runs, so ordering everything in one go gives the closest match.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Do these make a good gift?", "answer": "They do. A pair of neutral linen covers suits housewarmings, weddings and new homes because they fit almost any existing scheme. Since inserts are not included, it is worth mentioning that to the recipient or pairing the covers with a pad.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "How should I store spare covers?", "answer": "Fold them loosely and keep them somewhere dry and out of direct sunlight. Linen prefers to breathe, so a cloth bag or an open shelf is better than a sealed plastic box. Avoid storing them damp, since natural fibres can mark.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Can I use them outdoors?", "answer": "They are designed as indoor cushions. Occasional use on a covered patio on a dry day is unlikely to harm them, but leaving linen out in damp or strong sun is not a good idea. Bring them inside at the end of the day.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "Do the two covers match exactly?", "answer": "They are sold as a pair in the same light grey. Stonewashed linen has a natural variation in tone and texture, so two covers can differ very slightly, which is normal for the fabric and not a fault.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "What if the covers are not right when they arrive?", "answer": "Get in touch with us and we will sort it out under the returns policy that applies to your order. It helps if the covers are unwashed and in their original packaging, since washed items are harder to accept back. Tell us what did not work, whether that is the shade of grey, the size or the feel, and we will point you to a better fit.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Cushion Covers 40 cm, Light Grey, Set of 2", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/stonewashed-linen-cushion-covers-40-cm-light-grey/" }, { "question": "What exactly do I get in this set?", "answer": "You get three matching brass candle holders. They are identical, so you can use them as a group or split them between rooms. Candles are not included.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "What are the holders made from?", "answer": "They are made from brass with a polished gold finish, as stated by the maker. The colour is golden.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "How big is each holder?", "answer": "Each one measures about 5 cm long by 5 cm wide by 3.4 cm high. The stated item diameter is 50 mm and the height is 34 mm. They are small, low pieces rather than tall candlesticks.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "How much does each holder weigh?", "answer": "Around 30 g per holder, going by the maker's figure. That is light, so they are easy to move about and store.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "What size candle fits?", "answer": "They take thin candles up to 6.7 mm in diameter. Measure your candle at the base before buying. Anything thicker will not seat properly in the cup.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Will a standard dinner candle fit?", "answer": "Many standard dinner tapers are wider than 6.7 mm, so check first. These holders are best thought of as thin taper candle holders rather than holders for chunky dinner candles.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Do chime or spell candles fit?", "answer": "Chime and spell candles are usually around 12 to 13 mm, which is too wide. Slimmer tapers of 6.7 mm or less will seat correctly. Always measure rather than guess.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Can I use tealights or pillar candles in these?", "answer": "No. The cup is made for a thin taper, not for a tealight cup or a pillar base. Using the wrong candle type means it will not sit safely upright.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Are these good for a wedding table?", "answer": "Yes. The maker suggests them for weddings and communions, and the low profile suits long banquet tables. Several sets in a line down the centre give a simple gold look.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Do they sit stable on a table?", "answer": "The 50 mm base gives a wider footing than the candle itself, which helps. On a flat, hard surface they sit well. On soft cloth or an uneven runner, press them down gently so they settle level.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Will they scratch my table?", "answer": "Metal on bare wood can mark over time. If your table is polished or delicate, pop a small felt pad, coaster or tray underneath. A tray also catches any stray wax.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Does the brass get hot?", "answer": "Brass conducts heat, so the holder will warm up while a candle burns down. Let it cool before handling and always keep it on a heat-safe surface.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "How do I clean wax out of the cup?", "answer": "Let the wax cool and harden first, then lift it out gently with your fingers or a blunt wooden stick. Avoid metal blades, which can scratch the polished finish. Wipe with a soft dry cloth afterwards.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Can I put them in the dishwasher?", "answer": "No. Dishwasher detergent and heat are harsh on a polished brass finish. Wipe by hand instead, and dry immediately if you use any water.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Will the brass tarnish?", "answer": "Brass naturally dulls over time with air and handling, and some people like that softer patina. If you prefer bright, buff with a soft dry cloth regularly and keep them somewhere dry.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Can I polish them?", "answer": "A soft cloth and a gentle brass polish will bring back shine. Test on the underside first, work in small circles, and buff off every trace of polish before you light a candle.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Are they suitable for outdoor use?", "answer": "They are tabletop pieces. You could use them on a sheltered patio table in still weather, but bring them in afterwards so damp does not dull the finish.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Do they work with LED taper candles?", "answer": "Only if the LED candle stem is 6.7 mm or thinner at the base, which is uncommon. Most LED tapers are much wider. Check the measurement before ordering.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Can I use them as a bud vase or ring dish?", "answer": "The cup is narrow and shallow, so it is not built for water or jewellery. Stick to candles. The set works far better as part of a marble and brass decor arrangement than as storage.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "How should I arrange three holders?", "answer": "A straight line down the centre of a table is the easiest win. A loose triangle on a tray looks more relaxed. Varying the candle heights gives the group a bit of movement.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Do they match other brass pieces?", "answer": "Polished gold brass tones sit well together even when the shade varies slightly. Mixing them with marble coasters, brass trays or plain ceramics is a reliable look.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Are these a good gift?", "answer": "They make a straightforward housewarming, wedding or thank you gift. A set of three feels generous without being fussy, and most people have somewhere to put them. Add a pack of thin tapers to finish the gift off.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Can I buy more than one set?", "answer": "Yes. Several sets give you the long row look along a dining table or mantelpiece. Buying together helps keep the finish consistent across the group.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Are they handmade?", "answer": "Our product record does not say they are handmade. The maker describes them as shiny brass for everyday use. Small differences between the three can occur.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "What shape are they?", "answer": "Each holder is a small vase-shaped cup on a flat round base, as pictured. The base is 50 mm across and the whole piece is 34 mm tall.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Is the finish shiny or matt?", "answer": "Shiny. The maker describes the finish as polished and high-gloss, in a gold colour.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Is each holder exactly identical?", "answer": "They are made to the same specification, though small differences in finish or tone can show on brass items. Those slight variations are normal for metal pieces rather than a fault.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Can I use them on a mantelpiece or shelf?", "answer": "Yes. They are tabletop holders, which covers any flat surface. Keep a clear gap above the flame and away from curtains, shelves and anything flammable.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "Any safety advice for burning candles?", "answer": "Never leave a burning candle unattended, keep it away from children and pets, and put it out before the flame reaches the holder. Burn on a level, heat-safe surface and trim the wick to keep the flame small.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "What if they are not right when they arrive?", "answer": "Keep the packaging and get in touch with our team. If the size, finish or candle fit is not what you expected, we will walk you through a return or exchange under the returns policy on your local store.", "source": "Brass Candle Holders Set of 3 for Thin Taper Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-candle-holders-set-of-3/" }, { "question": "What exactly is a chamberstick candle holder?", "answer": "A chamberstick is a low candle holder with a wide base, traditionally carried from room to room at night. This one stands 5 cm high on a 10 cm round base, which keeps the flame low and the whole piece stable. It is a classic shape that has barely changed in centuries.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "What is this candle holder made of?", "answer": "It is made of brass with a gold-plated finish, as stated by the maker. Brass gives it a warm tone, and the gold plating gives the surface its colour.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "How tall is it?", "answer": "The candlestick is 5 cm high. That is deliberately low, so the candlelight sits close to the table rather than up at eye level. It is one of the things that makes a chamberstick different from a tall candlestick.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "How wide is the base?", "answer": "The base has a diameter of 10 cm. Overall it measures 10 cm long by 10 cm wide by 5 cm high. The wide base is what gives it stability on a tabletop.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "What size candles does it take?", "answer": "The maker says a round candle with a diameter of 2 cm is suitable. Candles of about that size are widely sold. Always check the diameter on the candle packaging before buying a large batch.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Will a standard dinner candle fit?", "answer": "Check the pack. Many dinner candles are sold at around 2 cm across, which matches this holder, but some run a little wider. If a candle is slightly wider, do not force it. If it is slightly narrower, a small wrap of candle tape or a sticky candle fixer will hold it upright.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Can I use a tea light in it instead?", "answer": "The cup is shaped for a 2 cm candle rather than a tea light. A tea light in its metal case will not sit the way the holder is designed for. Stick to the candle size it was made for.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "Gold, which the maker describes as an antique, vintage gold. It comes from the gold-plated finish over the brass. In candlelight it reads as warm and slightly aged rather than bright yellow.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Is the finish shiny or matt?", "answer": "The maker lists the finish as polished. That means a reflective surface that picks up and bounces candlelight. Over time, handling and use may soften the shine in places, which suits a piece in an antique style.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "How many pieces are included?", "answer": "One. You receive a single candle holder. If you want a matched pair or a row along a table, you would order more than one.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Are candles included?", "answer": "No. You receive the holder only. Plan to buy round candles of about 2 cm in diameter separately. That also lets you pick your preferred colour.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Where is a good place to put it?", "answer": "It is a tabletop piece, so a dining table, side table, mantelpiece, bedside table or shelf all work. The low 5 cm height means it will not block the view across a table. On a bedside table it gives a calm, low light at night.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Does it work as a decorative object when not lit?", "answer": "Yes. A small polished brass piece reads as an ornament in its own right, especially on a marble tray or against darker wood. You can keep it on a shelf and only light it occasionally.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Will it suit a modern interior?", "answer": "It can. Brass sits comfortably in modern rooms as a warm accent against neutral paint, pale stone and plain textiles. The shape is traditional, but one small antique style taper holder in a minimal room often looks intentional rather than fussy.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Does it have a handle?", "answer": "Yes. As pictured, a curled finger loop rises from one side of the dish, which is the traditional chamberstick form. The maker calls the piece a hand light.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Is it a religious item?", "answer": "The maker lists its theme as religious, which reflects the traditional use of this kind of holder in devotional and church settings. It works just as well as everyday home decor.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Is it heavy?", "answer": "The maker gives the weight as 0.212 kg, which is about 212 g. That is enough to sit steadily on a table, and the 10 cm base helps too.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Dust it with a soft, dry cloth. If you need to remove a smudge, a barely damp cloth followed by an immediate dry wipe is enough. Avoid abrasive pads and strong chemical cleaners, which can mark a gold-plated surface.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "How do I get candle wax off?", "answer": "Let the wax cool and harden completely first, then ease it off gently with your fingers or a blunt plastic edge. Never use a knife or metal scraper on the plating. A brief warm air blow from a hairdryer can soften stubborn wax enough to lift cleanly.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Can it go in the dishwasher?", "answer": "No. Dishwasher detergent and heat are harsh on plated finishes and can dull or damage them. Hand care with a dry or barely damp cloth is the right approach.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Will the brass tarnish?", "answer": "Brass naturally changes tone over time, and plating can wear with heavy handling. Keeping the holder dry and dusted slows this down. Some owners enjoy the softer, older look that develops, which is part of the appeal of an antique style candlestick.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Is it safe to leave burning?", "answer": "Never leave any burning candle unattended, and keep it away from curtains, paper and anything that can catch. Place it on a heat-tolerant surface, since the metal warms up during a long burn. Keep it out of reach of children and pets.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Does it protect the table from wax?", "answer": "The wide 10 cm base catches a reasonable amount of drip from a correctly fitted candle. For complete peace of mind on a good table, set it on a coaster, tile or marble tray. That also makes an attractive pairing visually.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Can I use several together?", "answer": "Yes, and it often looks better that way. Two or three low holders spaced along a dinner table create an even line of light people can talk across. Mixing in a taller candlestick gives you height variation without losing the look.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for outdoor use?", "answer": "It is a tabletop piece, and damp and weather are not kind to plated metal finishes. If you use it on a covered patio for an evening, bring it back inside afterwards and dry it if needed.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Would it make a good gift?", "answer": "It does. A single brass object is an easy present for a housewarming, a wedding or a quiet thank you. It suits many tastes without being too personal.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Can I pair it with marble pieces?", "answer": "Yes. Gold-toned brass against white or grey marble is a long-standing pairing, which is why it sits in our marble and brass decor range. A marble coaster or tray under the holder makes a tidy little vignette.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "Does it come assembled?", "answer": "It is supplied as a single piece, so there is nothing to put together. Unpack it, give it a quick dust and set your candle in place. That is all there is to it.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "What if the candle wobbles in the cup?", "answer": "That usually means the candle is a little under 2 cm in diameter. A small amount of candle adhesive, a strip of candle tape, or a few drops of wax from the candle itself set into the cup will hold it steady. Let any melted wax set before lighting.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for my home?", "answer": "If it arrives and it is not what you hoped for, contact our team and we will walk you through the returns process for your country. Keep the packaging if you can, since it makes a return much easier. We would rather sort it out than have you keep something you will not use.", "source": "Brass Chamberstick Candle Holder with Gold-Plated Finish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/brass-hand-chandelier-candle-holder/" }, { "question": "What is this product?", "answer": "It is a small decorative bowl carved from natural white marble, with a scalloped or ruffled rim. The maker states it is hand carved and measures about 15 cm (6 inches) across. It is sold as a single piece.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "What is the bowl made from?", "answer": "Natural marble, described by the maker as hand carved. The colour is white, with the small variations in tone and veining that occur naturally in the stone.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "How big is it?", "answer": "It is about 15 cm (6 inches) across, as stated by the maker, and about 5 cm (2 inches) high going by the maker's size picture. That width makes it roughly the size of a side plate.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "What does \"ruffle\" mean in the name?", "answer": "The rim is cut into soft waves rather than a straight circular edge, a bit like the fluted edge of a shell or a pastry case. It is a decorative shaping of the stone, not an added trim. Because it is hand carved, the scallops vary slightly.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Is each bowl identical?", "answer": "No. Marble is a natural stone, so the veining and tone differ from one piece to the next. Hand carving also means the ruffles are not machine-perfect. That variation is part of the appeal.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "What finish does it have?", "answer": "The maker describes a mirror finish, made by rubbing the marble thoroughly with a finishing stone. The surface is smooth and reflects light, as pictured.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Can I use it for food?", "answer": "The maker describes it as tableware for serving and storage. For dry foods such as whole fruit, nuts in shell or wrapped sweets it works well. Avoid leaving acidic or oily foods sitting directly on the stone for long periods.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Will lemons damage it?", "answer": "Whole lemons sitting in the bowl are fine. Spilled lemon juice is the problem, because acid etches marble and can leave a dull patch. Wipe any juice away promptly and dry the surface.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Is it dishwasher safe?", "answer": "No. Natural stone should not go in a dishwasher, where heat and detergent can dull the polish over time. Hand wipe with a soft damp cloth instead and dry straight away.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Can it go in the microwave or oven?", "answer": "No. Keep it away from microwaves, ovens and direct heat. Stone can crack under sudden temperature change.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "A soft cloth dampened with warm water handles most jobs. For anything stickier, a drop of mild washing-up liquid on the cloth is enough. Dry it afterwards rather than letting water sit in the ruffles.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "What should I not use on it?", "answer": "Avoid bleach, scouring powder, abrasive pads, vinegar-based cleaners and anything branded as a limescale remover. These are all hard on polished marble. Plain water and a mild detergent are safer.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Does it need sealing?", "answer": "The maker does not state that the bowl is sealed or that sealing is required. Marble is naturally porous, so the practical approach is to wipe spills quickly. If you want to seal it, use a product made specifically for natural stone and follow its instructions.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Will it scratch my furniture?", "answer": "Stone bases can mark softer surfaces if dragged. Lift the bowl rather than sliding it, and if it sits on polished wood, a small felt pad or a fabric coaster underneath removes the risk entirely.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Where does it look best?", "answer": "Good spots are a coffee table, a console table by the front door, a kitchen island or a dressing table. Anywhere you want a small point of weight and texture. It also works on a dining table with fruit in it.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Can I use it as a jewellery dish?", "answer": "Yes. The maker suggests it as a ring dish. The smooth stone is gentle on rings and earrings, and the ruffled rim stops small items rolling off. It suits a bedside table or a dressing table.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Would it work as a key bowl by the door?", "answer": "It is well suited to it. Marble is dense, so the bowl is less likely to slide when you drop keys in, and the stone is easy to wipe clean of pocket dust.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for a bathroom?", "answer": "It can be used in a bathroom for cotton pads, soap or jewellery. Keep it away from standing water and acidic products, and dry it if it gets splashed. Toothpaste and cleaning sprays should not be left on the surface.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Can I put a candle in it?", "answer": "A tealight in its own metal cup can sit in the bowl, provided the bowl is on a stable, heat-tolerant surface. Do not pour hot wax directly onto the stone. Never leave a lit candle unattended.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Should I keep it away from small children?", "answer": "Yes. It is heavy and hard, so keep it on a stable surface out of reach of small children. Dropped on a toe or a tiled floor it could cause injury or chip. Treat it as you would any stone or glass object.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "What if it chips?", "answer": "Marble can chip if struck against something hard. Small chips on a rim can often be smoothed with fine wet-and-dry paper, though the polish will differ slightly at that point. The sensible precaution is to keep it away from table edges.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Does the colour change over time?", "answer": "Natural marble can develop a slight patina with use, particularly where it is handled often. Stains from acidic or oily spills are the main cause of visible change. Regular wiping keeps the surface looking as it arrived.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Is it the same as the serving bowls I see in restaurants?", "answer": "Those are usually a larger, deeper shape. This one is a shallow decorative bowl at around 15 cm across, better described as a dish or catchall. It is closer to a trinket dish than to a mixing bowl.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Is it stackable?", "answer": "Stacking is not recommended. The ruffled rims do not nest neatly and stone against stone risks chipping. If you buy more than one, store or display them separately.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Does it come with anything else?", "answer": "It is sold as a single piece. No stand, lid or liner is included.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Does it make a good gift?", "answer": "It does. A neutral white stone bowl suits most interiors, which makes it a low-risk present. The maker suggests it for housewarmings, weddings, birthdays and Christmas.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "Will it match brass or gold accents?", "answer": "White marble and warm metals are a classic pairing, which is why it sits in the marble and brass decor range. The white stone also works alongside chrome and black metal. It is an easy piece to style.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "How should I store it if I am not using it?", "answer": "Wrap it in a soft cloth or bubble wrap and keep it upright in a box, away from heavy items that could press on the rim. Store somewhere dry. Avoid stacking anything on top of it.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "How is delivery and returns handled?", "answer": "Delivery and returns follow the standard policy shown at checkout for your country storefront. Because this is a stone item, keep the original packaging until you are happy with it. Contact us before returning anything so we can advise on safe packing.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right when it arrives?", "answer": "Get in touch and we will sort it out. If the bowl is damaged in transit, send a photo and we will arrange a replacement or refund. If it simply is not the size or shade you pictured, the standard returns window applies, so repack it carefully and let us know.", "source": "Marble Ruffle Bowl, Hand Carved Scalloped Dish", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-ruffle-bowl/" }, { "question": "What is this tray made from?", "answer": "It is made from 100% natural marble, as stated by the maker. What you see on the surface is the stone itself.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "What size is the marble vanity tray?", "answer": "It measures 30 cm long, 20 cm wide and 3 cm high. That is a practical footprint for most basin ledges, dressing tables and side tables. Measure your surface first if space is tight.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Will my tray look exactly like the photographs?", "answer": "No, and that is expected with natural stone. Each piece has its own veining, so the pattern on your tray will differ from the images. The overall pale, Jazz White character stays consistent.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "The maker calls the colour Jazz White. Expect a white ground with faint grey veining, as pictured. The exact balance of light and dark varies from piece to piece.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Does it have handles?", "answer": "No. It is a plain rectangular tray with a low rim and no handles. Marble has noticeable heft at this size, so lift it with both hands rather than by one corner.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Can I use it in a bathroom?", "answer": "Yes, that is the main use it was sized for. It holds hand soap, toiletries and a folded hand towel on a vanity. Wipe up standing water rather than leaving it to sit on the stone.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Does marble stain?", "answer": "Natural marble is porous and can stain if coloured or oily liquids are left on it. Blot spills quickly and dry the surface. Perfume, oils, makeup and dark liquids are the ones to watch.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Use a soft, damp cloth and dry it straight away. A mild pH-neutral cleaner is fine for anything stubborn. Skip vinegar, lemon juice, bleach and scouring pads.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Why should I avoid acidic cleaners?", "answer": "Acids react with the calcium carbonate in marble and can leave dull patches, sometimes called etching. Those marks are physical, not surface dirt, so they will not wipe off. A neutral cleaner avoids the problem entirely.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable as a jewellery tray?", "answer": "Yes, it works very well as a marble jewellery tray on a dressing table or bedside. The flat surface keeps rings, earrings and a watch in one place. Take care with rough-set stones, which can scratch any polished surface over time.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Can I use it as a serving tray?", "answer": "Yes, people use it as a natural marble serving tray for small items such as cheese, chocolates or glasses. Wash and dry it before and after food use. It is not designed for hot pans straight off the hob.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Will it work on a kitchen worktop?", "answer": "It makes a tidy marble kitchen tray for oil, salt, pepper and a pot of utensils. Group the items you reach for daily and the worktop reads much calmer. Wipe oil drips off promptly.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Does it have a raised lip?", "answer": "Yes. As pictured, a low raised rim runs all the way round, within the 3 cm overall height. It is enough to stop a bottle sliding off, so treat it as a shallow tray rather than a deep box.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Will it scratch my furniture?", "answer": "Stone can mark polished wood if dragged. Lift rather than slide it. The maker shows four silicone pads on the underside, which sit between the stone and your furniture.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Can it sit in a shower or wet room?", "answer": "It is better suited to a vanity than a permanently wet area. Constant standing water on porous stone is not ideal. Keep it on a surface where it can dry out between uses.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Is it a good marble perfume tray?", "answer": "Yes. Group bottles together so they are easy to find and less likely to tip. Wipe any oily residue from the base of the bottles so it does not transfer to the stone.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "How many items will it hold?", "answer": "At 30 x 20 cm it comfortably takes a soap pump, a hand lotion, a small candle and a folded hand towel. Overloading it is the quickest route to a cluttered look again. Leave some bare stone showing.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Can I put a candle on it?", "answer": "Yes. Use a candle in a glass or metal vessel rather than a free-standing taper. Let wax cool fully before lifting it off, and never leave a lit candle unattended.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Will it chip?", "answer": "Marble is hard but brittle at the corners, so a sharp knock against a tap or a tiled edge can chip it. Handle it as you would a ceramic dish. Day-to-day use on a flat surface is no problem.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Is the surface polished?", "answer": "Yes. The maker shows a polished finish on the top and sides and a matt underside. The polished face is the one that wipes clean easily.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Is the underside protected?", "answer": "The maker shows a matt underside with four silicone pads. They keep the stone off the surface beneath and help the tray stay put.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Is it dishwasher safe?", "answer": "No. Natural stone should not go through a dishwasher, where heat and harsh detergent can damage the surface. Hand wipe with a damp cloth and dry it.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Can I use it outdoors?", "answer": "It is best kept indoors. Rain, frost and direct sun over long periods are hard on porous stone. A covered table for an afternoon is fine, but do not leave it outside.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Does it make a good gift?", "answer": "It is an easy one, because almost everyone has a basin or a dressing table that needs tidying. The one-off veining means each gift is genuinely unique. It suits housewarmings, weddings and birthdays.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Which rooms does it suit?", "answer": "Bathroom, bedroom, kitchen, living room and office all work. As a marble catchall tray by the front door it collects keys, cards and a watch. The neutral pale stone sits well with most colour schemes.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Does it match brass or gold fittings?", "answer": "Pale marble is a natural partner for warm metals, which is why marble and brass decor pairs so often. It also works with chrome, black and matt nickel. The stone acts as the quiet background.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Can I stack things on it?", "answer": "Light stacking is fine, such as folded flannels or small dishes. Avoid tall, top-heavy piles that can topple. The tray is a base, not a shelf.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "Is there any assembly?", "answer": "None. It is ready to use straight away. Give it a quick wipe before first use.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "How should I store it if I am not using it?", "answer": "Wrap it in a soft cloth or bubble wrap and store it flat. Standing it on edge risks a chip if it falls. Keep it away from heavy items that could be dropped on top.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for my space?", "answer": "If the size or the stone pattern does not suit your room, contact us and we will talk you through return options. Keep the original packaging where possible, since stone travels best in the box it arrived in. We would rather sort it out than leave you with a tray you do not use.", "source": "Marble Vanity Tray 30 x 20 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/marble-vanity-tray-30-x-20/" }, { "question": "What is this tray actually made from?", "answer": "It is made from wood, with a printed marble pattern on the inner surface and a gold-tone rim around the edge, as stated by the maker. It is not cut from natural marble. That keeps it light enough to carry with one hand.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Is it real marble?", "answer": "No. The marble look is a printed pattern applied to a wooden tray, not quarried stone. If you specifically want natural marble, this is not that product. It gives you a marble-style pattern in gold on white at a fraction of the weight.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "How big is it?", "answer": "The tray measures 30 cm across and 4 cm high. That is a common size for a coffee table grouping and still fits on most bedside tables and bathroom shelves.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "White, with the marble pattern printed in gold across the base and a gold-tone rim, as pictured. It reads as a soft neutral in most rooms.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Does it have handles?", "answer": "Yes, there are two cutout handles set into the rim. They let you pick up the tray with everything still arranged on it, which is useful when you want to wipe the table underneath.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Will things slide off the edge?", "answer": "The rim is raised and wide, which helps keep candles, glasses and small items contained. As with any tray, carry it level and do not overload the edges.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Can I serve drinks on it?", "answer": "Yes, it works as a drinks tray for carrying glasses or mugs a short distance. Use coasters under hot cups and wipe spills quickly, since the base is wood with a printed finish.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Is it waterproof?", "answer": "It is not designed to be submerged or left wet. Wipe spills promptly with a soft cloth and dry the surface, and it will stay looking fresh.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Can it go in the dishwasher?", "answer": "No. Wooden trays with printed finishes should never go in a dishwasher, as heat and prolonged water exposure will damage the surface. Hand wipe only.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "How do I clean it?", "answer": "Use a soft cloth, slightly damp, and dry straight after. Skip abrasive pads, scouring powders and strong solvents, which can wear the printed pattern.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Will hot mugs mark it?", "answer": "Direct heat is best avoided on any printed wooden surface. Put a coaster under hot drinks and you will not have a problem.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Is this a good ottoman tray?", "answer": "Yes. A round tray on a square or rectangular ottoman or footstool is a classic pairing, and on a soft-topped surface it gives drinks a flat, steady base.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Does it work as a dressing table tray?", "answer": "It does. Perfume bottles, lotions and a small jewellery dish all group neatly inside the 30 cm circle, which stops the dressing table from looking cluttered.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Can I use it in a bathroom?", "answer": "Yes, on a dry surface it works well for soap, hand cream and a candle. Keep it away from standing water and out of the shower splash zone.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for a bedside table?", "answer": "It is a sensible bedside tray if your bedside table is around 35 cm or wider. It gathers a glass, a book, reading glasses and a lamp base into one spot.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "How many candles can it hold?", "answer": "Three medium jar candles fit comfortably with room to spare, or one larger pillar candle with a small vase beside it. Always keep burning candles supervised and away from the rim.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Can I put a potted plant on it?", "answer": "Yes, as long as the pot has a saucer underneath to catch water. Standing water will damage a wooden tray over time.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Is it heavy?", "answer": "No. The maker's size picture gives the weight as about 0.44 kg. As it is a wooden tray rather than stone, it is far lighter than a marble tray of the same size.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "What is the height of the rim?", "answer": "The full tray height is 4 cm, which includes the base and the raised edge. That is low enough to slide under a table lamp but tall enough to hold items in place.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Will it scratch my table?", "answer": "The maker's pictures show a felt-covered underside, which is kinder to a table top than bare wood. Lift it rather than dragging it all the same, particularly on polished or glass surfaces.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Does it come in other sizes?", "answer": "We sell the 30 cm round version in white.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Is it stackable?", "answer": "It is a single tray with a raised rim and is not designed for stacking. Store it flat in a cupboard or leave it out as part of your styling.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Does it suit a drinks trolley?", "answer": "It does. A round tray on a rectangular trolley adds contrast, and the raised rim helps when you are grouping bottles and a small ice bucket.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Would this work on a kitchen worktop?", "answer": "Yes, it is a tidy way to hold oil, salt and pepper, or a coffee set-up beside the machine. Wipe any splashes rather than letting them sit.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Does it match brass or gold fittings?", "answer": "The rim is gold-toned, so it sits naturally alongside brass lamps, gold frames and warm metal hardware. That is the whole idea behind marble and brass decor.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Is it a good gift?", "answer": "It is an easy decor gift, because it is neutral, useful and does not need to match anything precisely. The maker suggests it for housewarmings, weddings, birthdays and Christmas.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "Will it suit a modern or a traditional room?", "answer": "Both. The pale marble look and round shape read as modern, but gold rims and tray styling have been part of traditional interiors for a very long time.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "How should I style it?", "answer": "Pick three heights (a candle, a small vase, something flat like a book or coasters) and group them towards the centre. Leave a little empty surface so it does not look crowded.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "What happens if it arrives damaged?", "answer": "Contact us with a photo and your order details and we will sort out a replacement or refund. Keep the packaging until you have checked the tray over.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for my space?", "answer": "If the size or finish does not work once you see it in the room, get in touch within the returns window and we will guide you through sending it back. Keep it unused and in its packaging so the process stays simple.", "source": "Round Marble Look Tray With Handles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/round-marble-tray-with-handles/" }, { "question": "What is this product exactly?", "answer": "It is a 400 g scented candle in a round glass jar, made with soy wax and eucalyptus and lavender essential oils, as stated by the maker. It uses a double cotton wick. The jar measures 9 cm across and 11 cm tall.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "What does it smell like?", "answer": "The blend pairs eucalyptus with lavender. Eucalyptus brings the clean, herbal note, while lavender softens it with a floral finish. The maker's scent notes also list armoise at the top, rose and melon in the middle, and patchouli, musk and woody notes at the base.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Why does it have two wicks?", "answer": "A jar 9 cm wide is too broad for one wick to melt evenly. Two cotton wicks spread the heat across the surface so the wax pool reaches the glass wall. That reduces tunnelling and means you actually use the wax you paid for.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "How big is the candle?", "answer": "It is a 400 g candle in a round glass jar measuring 9 cm wide by 11 cm high. That puts it firmly in large jar candle territory, bigger than a standard votive or travel tin.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Is soy wax better than paraffin?", "answer": "Soy wax melts at a lower temperature than most paraffin, so it tends to release fragrance more gradually. Many people find it less overpowering in small rooms. It is also plant derived, where paraffin comes from petroleum.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Is the candle vegan?", "answer": "The maker describes the wax as 100% vegan soy wax, made with essential oils and a cotton wick.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "How long will it burn?", "answer": "The maker states up to 80 hours. How long any candle actually lasts depends on burn session length, draughts and how carefully you trim the wicks.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Can I use it outdoors?", "answer": "The maker lists it for indoor use. Outdoor air movement pulls the flame around, burns the wax unevenly and scatters the fragrance before you can smell it, so keep it inside.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Where should I put it?", "answer": "Somewhere flat, heat resistant and out of a draught, at least a few centimetres from walls, books, curtains and shelves above. A bedside table, a bathroom shelf or a quiet corner of a living room all work well.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for a bathroom?", "answer": "Yes, and a bathroom is often where this blend lands well. A closed, warm, small room holds eucalyptus nicely. The maker lists spa among its uses.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Can I use it in the bedroom?", "answer": "Lavender is the classic bedroom scent, so yes. Light it an hour or so before sleep, enjoy it while you read, then put it out before you settle down. Never sleep with a candle burning.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Do I need to trim the wicks?", "answer": "Yes. Trim both wicks to roughly 5 mm before each light. Untrimmed wicks mushroom, flicker, smoke and leave soot on the inside of the glass.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "What is tunnelling and how do I avoid it?", "answer": "Tunnelling is when the flame burns a narrow hole down the middle and leaves hard wax clinging to the sides. Prevent it by letting the first burn run until the melted wax reaches the glass edge, which usually takes two to three hours in a jar this wide.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "How long should each burn session be?", "answer": "Around three to four hours is a sensible maximum. Longer than that and the glass gets hot, the wicks grow and the flame can start to dance. Let the candle cool fully before relighting.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Should I burn both wicks at once?", "answer": "Yes. The two wicks are designed to work together so the melt pool spreads evenly. Lighting only one will pull the burn to one side and waste wax on the other.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "What do I do if the flames get too tall?", "answer": "Put the candle out, let the wax cool and set, then trim both wicks back to 5 mm and relight. Tall flames usually mean the wicks need trimming or the candle is sitting in a draught.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "When should I stop burning it?", "answer": "Stop once about 10 mm of wax is left in the base. Burning past that point puts heat directly against the glass, which is hard on the jar you might want to keep.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Can I reuse the glass jar?", "answer": "Yes. Once the candle is finished and cooled, warm soapy water and a little patience will lift the last of the wax and the wick bases. The clean jar works as a pot for brushes, cotton pads or small odds and ends.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "How do I get the last of the wax out?", "answer": "Pour just-boiled water into the jar, leave it until the wax floats and sets on top, then lift the disc off and wipe the glass. Do not pour wax down a sink drain.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Can I burn it in a home with pets?", "answer": "Keep any lit candle well out of reach of cats and dogs, since tails and curious noses find flames. If a pet reacts to fragrance, burn it in a room they do not use and air the space afterwards.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Can I burn it in a home with children?", "answer": "Treat it like any open flame. Place it high, keep it out of reach, and never leave it burning in a room with unsupervised children. The glass gets hot during use and stays warm for a while after.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Does it contain essential oils?", "answer": "The maker states it is made with essential oils such as eucalyptus and lavender, in soy wax.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Will it scent a whole open-plan room?", "answer": "It is a large 400 g candle with two wicks, so it has more throw than a small single-wick jar. Even so, scent spreads best in a closed or medium-sized room. Open-plan spaces dilute fragrance quickly.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Does it come with a lid?", "answer": "The photographs show a wooden lid with the jar. Put the lid on once the wax has cooled and set, which keeps dust off the surface between burns.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Is it a good gift?", "answer": "It is one of the easier gifts to get right. A large jar, a widely liked scent pairing and a reusable glass vessel make it work for birthdays, thank-yous, housewarmings and Mother's Day.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Can I burn it during yoga or meditation?", "answer": "The maker lists yoga, meditation, spa and aromatherapy among its intended uses. Place it well away from your mat and any loose clothing, and keep it somewhere you will not knock it while moving.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "Does the scent fade over time?", "answer": "Any scented candle loses a little fragrance strength if stored uncovered for a long time. Keep it somewhere cool and dark with the lid or a cover on when not in use, and avoid windowsills in direct sun.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "How should I store it between uses?", "answer": "Cool, dry and out of sunlight. Heat softens soy wax and sunlight can fade both the wax and the label. A cupboard or a shaded shelf is ideal.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "How does it compare with a single-wick candle the same size?", "answer": "A single wick in a 9 cm jar can struggle to melt the full surface, which is why wide single-wick candles often tunnel. A two wick layout spreads the heat, and the maker describes this candle as giving an even burn.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me?", "answer": "Scent is personal, and eucalyptus is bolder than some people expect. If the candle is unused and still in its original condition, contact us within the returns window shown at checkout and we will walk you through sending it back. Tell us what you were hoping for and we can point you at a gentler option from the soy candles range.", "source": "Eucalyptus & Lavender Soy Candle 400 g Two Wick Jar", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/eucalyptus-lavender-soy-candle-400-g/" }, { "question": "What exactly comes in this soy candle gift set?", "answer": "You receive four scented candles, each weighing 255 g, for a total of 1,020 g of candle. Each candle carries its own fragrance and comes in its own colour of jar, so the set covers four different moods. The photographs show a black lid for each jar.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "What are the four scents?", "answer": "The set includes Pink Beach, Island Moonlight, Midsummer Dream and Lavender Fields. Pink Beach is built around coconut, vanilla and tropical fruit. Island Moonlight pairs coconut with a cooler watery note, Midsummer Dream brings lavender together with sage and cedar, and Lavender Fields combines lavender with amber.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Is the wax really 100% soy?", "answer": "The maker states the candles are made from 100% soy wax and not a mixed soy wax. We publish the wax type exactly as the maker gives it.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "How big is each candle?", "answer": "Each candle measures 7 cm wide and 8.8 cm high. That makes it a compact size suited to a bedside table, a shelf or a coffee table. It is not a large three-wick jar.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "How heavy is one candle?", "answer": "Each candle weighs 255 g. Four of them together come to 1,020 g, which is the figure the maker quotes for the set.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "What colour are the candles?", "answer": "Each scent has its own colour. In the photographs Pink Beach is pink, Lavender Fields is purple, Island Moonlight is teal and Midsummer Dream is black. Each jar has a picture label and a black lid.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Can these be used outdoors?", "answer": "The maker lists the set for indoor use. Outdoors, even a light breeze pushes the flame to one side, which burns the wax unevenly. Keep the set on an indoor surface away from open windows.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Is this a good candle gift set for her?", "answer": "It works well as one. The fragrances are approachable, the four colours look good together, and four candles feels generous.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Can I split the set into separate gifts?", "answer": "Yes. Four individually scented candles divide neatly into four small presents, or two gifts of two. This is a common approach for bridal shower favours and office secret santa.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "How long will each candle burn?", "answer": "The maker's figures vary a little. The product photographs give 50 hours per candle, the product name gives 200 hours for the set, and the description says up to 220 hours. We would plan on around 50 hours per candle, depending on session length, wick trimming and draughts.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "How should I burn it for the first time?", "answer": "Let the first burn run long enough for the melted wax to spread right out to the edge of the container. Soy wax has a memory and tends to follow the first wax pool on later burns. Skipping this step is the main cause of tunnelling down the middle.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "What is tunnelling and how do I avoid it?", "answer": "Tunnelling is when the candle burns a narrow hole down the centre and leaves a ring of unmelted wax around the edge. It happens when early burns are too short. Give the candle a full first burn and trim the wick each time, and the wax pool should stay even.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Do I need to trim the wick?", "answer": "Yes. Trim to roughly 5 mm before each burn using scissors or a wick trimmer. A long wick produces a tall, flickering flame that smokes and burns through wax faster than it should.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Why is my candle producing soot?", "answer": "Soot usually points to an untrimmed wick or a draught pulling the flame sideways. Blow it out, let the wax set, trim the wick back and move the candle away from vents, fans and open doorways. That solves it in most cases.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "When should I stop burning a candle?", "answer": "Stop once roughly 10 mm of wax remains at the base. Burning past that point puts heat directly into the bottom of the container. It is the standard guidance for any container candle, not just this one.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Can I burn these in a home with pets?", "answer": "Whatever the wax, keep lit candles well out of reach of animals, ventilate the room, and do not burn fragranced candles in a small closed space with a pet in it. Never leave a pet alone with a lit candle.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Will one candle scent a whole room?", "answer": "The maker says one burn is enough to fragrance a living room. A 255 g candle is a compact size, so in a large open-plan space you may want two burning at once. Match the candle to the room size.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Can I use these with a candle warmer lamp?", "answer": "Yes, and the maker suggests pairing them with a candle warmer lamp. A warmer lamp melts the top of the wax without an open flame, which releases fragrance and removes the need to trim a wick.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Are the fragrances strong or subtle?", "answer": "The maker describes the fragrance as filling a living room from a single burn. The notes used, coconut, vanilla, lavender, cedar and amber, are familiar and easy to live with, not sharp. That makes the set an easier choice when you are buying for someone else.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Which scent suits a bedroom best?", "answer": "Lavender Fields and Midsummer Dream are the two softer scents, since both are lavender-led. Start with Lavender Fields. Pink Beach is brighter and often works better in a living room or bathroom.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Is this suitable as a housewarming present?", "answer": "It is a sensible housewarming choice because candles do not clash with someone's new decor the way an ornament might. Four scents also means the recipient can pick what suits each room. It is one of the easier gifts to get right.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Can I use these as wedding or bridal shower favours?", "answer": "Yes, the maker names bridal showers as one of the occasions. Four candles covers a small table of guests, and the labelled jars look finished as they are. For larger guest lists you would need several sets.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Do the candles come in a gift box?", "answer": "A gift box is not listed in the product details, so we do not promise one. The four lidded jars look neat given as they are, or with a ribbon.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Do the jars have lids?", "answer": "Yes. The photographs show a black lid for each of the four jars. Put the lid on once the wax has cooled and set, which keeps dust off the surface between burns.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Where should I store candles I am not burning yet?", "answer": "Keep spares somewhere cool, dry and out of direct sunlight. Heat softens soy wax and sunlight can fade both the wax and the container over time. A cupboard or drawer is ideal.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "How do I clean the container once the candle is finished?", "answer": "Let any remaining wax set, then scoop it out gently with a blunt tool, or soften it with warm water around the outside of the container. Wash with warm soapy water and dry fully. The empty jars are handy for cotton buds, hair ties or small plants.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Can I burn more than one at the same time?", "answer": "You can, but keep different fragrances in different rooms. Two competing scents in one space tend to cancel each other out rather than combine. One candle per room is usually the better result.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "Is this set good value compared with buying candles singly?", "answer": "You are getting 1,020 g of soy wax across four candles in one purchase. When you compare sets, the total wax weight and the number of distinct fragrances are the two numbers worth checking.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "How many wicks does each candle have?", "answer": "One. The photographs show a single wick in the centre of each jar.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "What if the set is not right when it arrives?", "answer": "Get in touch with our team and tell us what the problem is. We will walk you through the returns process. Keep the original packaging where you can, since it makes a return simpler.", "source": "Soy Candle Gift Set, 4 Pack of 255 g Scented Soy Wax Candles", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/soy-candle-gift-set-4-pack/" }, { "question": "What exactly is this apron?", "answer": "It is a Japanese style cross back pinafore apron made from a cotton and linen weave, in the White Flower print. It goes on over your head and ties with a bow at each side of the waist. Two pockets sit on the front.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "How does a cross back apron differ from a normal one?", "answer": "A standard apron hangs from a single loop around your neck, which puts all the weight on one spot. A cross back apron has two straps that cross behind your shoulder blades instead, sharing the load across both shoulders. Most people find it noticeably more comfortable for long jobs.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Is there a neck strap to adjust?", "answer": "No. The shoulder straps are fixed and crossed at the back, which is what makes it so quick to put on. The only adjustment is at the waist, using the ties at each side.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "What is it made from?", "answer": "Cotton and linen. The maker lists both fibres but does not state the percentages, so it is a cotton and linen weave and not pure linen.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Is it waterproof?", "answer": "No. It is a woven cloth apron, not a coated or laminated one. It will catch splashes and crumbs, but water will soak through, so treat it as everyday cover rather than a barrier.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "What size is it?", "answer": "It is one size. The maker gives the length as about 96 cm, not counting the shoulder straps, with a front waist of about 43 cm and a back waist of about 43 cm. The side ties let you draw the waist tighter or looser.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Will it fit a taller person?", "answer": "The apron is about 96 cm long from the top of the bib, not counting the shoulder straps, so it sits around mid-calf on the model in the photographs. On a taller wearer the hem will sit higher on the leg.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Who is it sized for?", "answer": "The maker describes it as one size that fits most and says the way of wearing can be adjusted to suit women of different sizes. The side ties are what let one size suit a range of shapes.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "How many pockets does it have?", "answer": "Two large pockets on the front. The maker suggests them for recipe cards, gloves, glasses, a phone and other small items.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Are the pockets deep enough for a phone?", "answer": "The maker lists a phone among the things the two front pockets will hold. As with any front pocket, be a little careful when bending right over.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "This is the White Flower design: an off-white ground covered with a small floral print in soft pink, green and pale yellow.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Is it a good apron for everyday cooking?", "answer": "An everyday apron needs to go on fast, stay on, and be easy to wash. This cross back style goes straight over the head with nothing to fasten at the neck, and it can be machine washed or hand washed.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Is it good for baking?", "answer": "It suits baking. The pockets take a dough scraper or a timer, and the cross back shape keeps your neck free during long sessions at the bench.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Can I use it for gardening?", "answer": "Yes, the maker lists gardening among its uses. The front pockets take twine, seed packets, gloves or your phone. Heavy wet work will soak through, since the fabric is not waterproof.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Does it work as an artist smock?", "answer": "Yes, the maker suggests it as an artist smock and for painting and DIY. It covers the front of your clothes and the pockets hold brushes or tools. Paint and clay can mark the fabric, so keep a dedicated apron for messy work if you want this one to stay clean.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Will it shrink in the wash?", "answer": "Cotton and linen can tighten slightly on the first wash. Washing cool and drying flat or on a line keeps movement to a minimum. Avoid a hot tumble dry if you want to keep the original shape.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "How should I wash it?", "answer": "Machine wash or hand wash, both are fine according to the maker's care information. A gentle cycle with a mild detergent, similar colours and no bleach is a sensible routine. Line drying is kinder to the weave than a hot dryer.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Can I iron it?", "answer": "Yes. A warm iron on the reverse will smooth out creases in the cotton and linen weave. Ironing while the apron is slightly damp gives the crispest finish. Many people simply shake it out and hang it, since a little texture suits the style.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "How do I get a grease stain out?", "answer": "Treat it as soon as you can. Blot the excess, work a little washing up liquid into the mark, leave it for a few minutes, then wash as usual. Avoid drying it with heat until the mark has gone, as heat can set a stain.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Is the pattern on both sides of the apron?", "answer": "Yes. In the photographs the same floral print covers the bib, the pleated skirt, the back panel, the straps and the ties.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "How do I tie it?", "answer": "The front and back panels meet at each side of the waist, where a pair of ties knots into a bow. Tie the bows closer for a snugger fit or leave them looser for an easier drape.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Does it stay in place while I move around?", "answer": "The straps sit over both shoulders and cross at the back, and the waist is tied at both sides, so the apron is held in four places rather than hanging from the neck. Tighten the side bows a little if you want it closer.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Is it comfortable in a hot kitchen?", "answer": "The maker describes the apron as lightweight. It is a woven cotton and linen cloth rather than a coated or plastic apron, and the cross back straps keep the weight off your neck.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Can it be worn as part of an outfit?", "answer": "Yes. The maker describes it as a pinafore dress as well as an apron and suggests it as a casual outfit. In the photographs it is worn over a white shirt dress.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Does it suit a professional kitchen or stall?", "answer": "It is a cloth apron for home cooking, gardening, cleaning and craft. It is not intended for heavy wet work or any task needing a waterproof layer.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Is it machine washable at high temperature?", "answer": "The maker's care information allows machine washing but gives no temperature. A cooler gentle wash is the cautious choice for a printed cotton and linen cloth.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "What comes in the package?", "answer": "One apron.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "Does it make a good gift?", "answer": "It can. The maker suggests it as a gift and as a housewarming present. It suits someone who cooks, bakes or spends time in the garden, and the side ties mean one size suits a range of shapes.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "How should I store it?", "answer": "Hang it on a hook near where you use it, which keeps creases out and means you actually reach for it. Folding it into a drawer with the rest of your table linen is fine too. Make sure it is fully dry before storing to avoid musty smells.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me when it arrives?", "answer": "Keep the apron unwashed and in its original packaging, then contact us and we will talk you through the returns process. Tell us what did not work, whether that is the fit, the length or the look.", "source": "Japanese Style Cotton Linen Cross Back Apron", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/cotton-linen-apron-japanese/" }, { "question": "What exactly do I get in this set?", "answer": "You get four square napkins, each measuring 39 x 39 cm. All four are the same natural beige and each has a crochet edge. There are no napkin rings or other pieces in the set.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What are the napkins made from?", "answer": "They are made from 100% linen with a crochet edge, as stated by the maker. Linen is woven from flax, a plant fibre. The maker also states they are made in the EU.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What is a crochet edge?", "answer": "It is a band of openwork trim that runs around the border of each napkin, a little like lace. It gives a plain linen square a decorative finish. The centre of the napkin is plain cloth.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What colour are they?", "answer": "The maker lists the colour as natural beige. It is a soft, warm neutral, close to the colour most people picture when they think of linen. The finish is solid, with no print or stripe.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "How big is each napkin?", "answer": "Each napkin is 39 x 39 cm, which is about 15.6 inches square. All four are the same size.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Is 39 x 39 cm big enough for dinner?", "answer": "It is on the smaller side for a dinner napkin, and it does the job for most meals at home. It suits lunch, breakfast and afternoon tea especially well. For a long, messy, hands-on meal you may prefer a larger napkin of 45 cm or more.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "How do I wash them?", "answer": "The maker's care instruction is to machine wash at 40°C, and the maker recommends a gentle or linen cycle. Wash them with similar colours and use a mild detergent.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Why does the maker suggest a gentle cycle?", "answer": "A gentle cycle moves the wash around less. That is kinder to the open crochet edge, which has more loose loops than a plain hem. The linen itself copes well with washing.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Should I use a laundry bag?", "answer": "It is a sensible extra step. A mesh laundry bag stops the crochet edge catching on zips, hooks and buttons from other items in the load. It takes a few seconds and helps the edge keep its shape.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Should I wash them before the first use?", "answer": "Yes, it is a good idea. A first wash freshens the cloth and settles the weave. It also lets you see how the napkins behave in your machine before they go on the table.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Will they shrink?", "answer": "Linen can shrink slightly on its first wash, which is normal for a natural fibre. Washing at the maker's stated 40°C and avoiding very hot drying keeps any change small.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Can they go in the tumble dryer?", "answer": "The maker's care instruction covers washing only. Drying them flat or on a line is the cautious choice, and it is gentler on the crochet edge. If you do use a dryer, keep the heat low and take them out slightly damp.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "How do I iron a napkin with a crochet edge?", "answer": "Iron while the napkin is still slightly damp. Lay it face down on a towel and press from the back, so the crochet pattern is pushed into the towel instead of being flattened. Ease the edge into shape with your fingers first.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Should I use fabric softener?", "answer": "It is better to leave it out. Softener coats the fibres and makes linen less absorbent, which is the opposite of what you want from a napkin.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Can I bleach them?", "answer": "It is better not to. Bleach weakens linen fibres and can leave pale patches on a natural beige cloth. A proper wash with a good detergent is the safer route.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "How do I get a red wine stain out?", "answer": "Act quickly. Blot the stain without rubbing, then rinse it with cold water from the back of the cloth before washing as normal. Keep hot water away from the stain, since heat can set it.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What about grease or lipstick?", "answer": "Work a small amount of washing-up liquid into the mark with your fingers, leave it for a few minutes, then wash as normal. Check the mark has gone before you dry the napkin, because heat can fix what is left.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Will the crochet edge snag?", "answer": "Any openwork trim can catch on sharp things, such as fork tines, rings or a rough basket. Normal use at the table is fine. If a loop does pull, ease it back gently instead of cutting it.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Can I use them every day?", "answer": "Yes. They are machine washable at 40°C, so there is no need to save them for guests. Many people keep a plain set for weeknights and bring these out when they want the table to look more dressed.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Where are they made?", "answer": "The maker states the napkins are made in the EU.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "How should I fold them to show the edge?", "answer": "Keep the fold simple so the crochet stays on view. A flat rectangle beside the plate with the edge facing out works well. A triangle on the plate, with the point towards the guest, shows two sides of the trim at once.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Do they work with napkin rings?", "answer": "Yes. Roll or gather the napkin loosely and slide it through the ring so the crochet edge fans out at each end. Pick a ring with a smooth inside so it does not catch the trim.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Are they a good size for afternoon tea?", "answer": "Yes. A 39 cm square sits neatly on a lap or beside a small plate, and the crochet edge suits the look of a tea table. It is a natural use for this size.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "How many sets do I need for eight people?", "answer": "Two sets give you eight napkins, one for each guest. If you like a spare or two for the bread basket or a late arrival, three sets is a comfortable number.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What tableware do they go with?", "answer": "Natural beige is an easy colour to place. It works with white and cream china, clear or coloured glass and bare wood. The crochet edge also pairs well with older, more traditional plates.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Are they absorbent?", "answer": "Linen takes up moisture well and releases it again quickly. That is why it has long been used for napkins and tea towels. It also means the napkins dry fast after washing.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Will the linen feel stiff when new?", "answer": "New linen can feel a little crisp at first. It softens with washing and use, and most people find it more pleasant after the first few washes. That crispness also helps a napkin hold a neat fold.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "How do these compare with cotton napkins?", "answer": "Linen has a drier, more textured feel than cotton and holds a crease well. Cotton tends to feel smoother at first. These napkins are 100% linen, as stated by the maker.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Do they make a good gift?", "answer": "Table linen is a useful present for a wedding, a housewarming or a keen host. A set of four with a decorative edge feels complete as it is.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What if they are not right when they arrive?", "answer": "Contact us and we will talk you through the returns process. Keep the napkins unwashed and in their original packaging if you think you may send them back. Tell us what was wrong, whether that is the size, the colour or the feel.", "source": "Crochet Edged Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/crochet-edged-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What exactly do I get in this set?", "answer": "You get four square napkins, each measuring 45 x 45 cm. They are all the same beige colour and the same plain, solid finish. There are no rings, ties or extra pieces included.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "What are the napkins made from?", "answer": "They are made from 100% linen that has been stonewashed, as stated by the maker. The maker also states they are made in the EU.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "What does stonewashed mean for linen?", "answer": "Stonewashing is a finishing wash that softens and relaxes the fibre before the fabric is sold. It takes the stiffness out of new linen, so the napkin feels broken in straight away. It also gives the surface a slightly textured, lived-in look.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Are these napkins scratchy when new?", "answer": "They should not be. Untreated linen can feel crisp at first, but the maker stonewashes this linen for softness, so the napkins feel relaxed from the first use.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Is 45 x 45 cm a good size for dinner napkins?", "answer": "Yes, it is a practical everyday size, roughly 17.7 inches square. It is big enough to sit flat across a lap and stay there through a meal. Smaller napkins tend to slip, and much larger ones can feel bulky on a small table.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Will beige go with my existing table linen?", "answer": "Beige is one of the easiest colours to match. This one has a warm, slightly brown tone. It works with white and cream crockery, natural wood, dark slate and most tablecloths.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Can I use these for a wedding or a big event?", "answer": "Yes, the maker suggests them for events as well as homes and restaurants. Plain linen napkins suit most colour schemes. For a larger table you would simply order multiple sets of four.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "How many sets do I need for eight people?", "answer": "Two sets gives you eight napkins, one each. If you want a spare for serving or a second course, three sets is a comfortable number. For a big seasonal gathering, it is worth having a few extra on hand.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "How do I wash them?", "answer": "The maker's care instruction is to machine wash at 40°C. Wash with similar colours and avoid bleach and fabric softener.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Should I wash them before the first use?", "answer": "It is a good idea. A first wash settles the weave and removes any residue from manufacturing. It also lets you see how the fabric behaves in your machine before you put it on the table.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Will they shrink?", "answer": "Linen can shrink slightly on its first wash, which is normal for natural fibres. Washing at the maker's stated 40°C and avoiding very hot drying keeps any change small.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Do I have to iron them?", "answer": "No. Stonewashed linen looks good with a soft crease, which is part of its appeal. If you prefer a sharper table, iron while slightly damp on the linen setting. Either look is perfectly correct.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Can they go in the tumble dryer?", "answer": "The maker's care instruction covers washing only, at 40°C. Line drying is the cautious choice. If you do tumble dry, use a low heat and pull them out while still a little damp.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "How do I get a red wine stain out?", "answer": "Deal with it quickly. Blot, do not rub, then rinse the area with cold water from the back of the fabric before washing as normal. Avoid hot water on the stain itself, since heat can set it.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "What about grease or candle wax?", "answer": "For grease, a small amount of washing-up liquid worked into the spot before the machine wash usually lifts it. For wax, let it harden, scrape off the surface gently, then place kitchen paper over the mark and press with a warm iron to draw the rest out.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Can I bleach them to keep them bright?", "answer": "Bleach is not recommended. It weakens linen fibres and can create patchy colour on a dyed beige. A good detergent and a proper wash cycle will keep them looking right.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Are these suitable for everyday meals, not just special occasions?", "answer": "Yes. They are machine washable at 40°C, so there is no reason to save them for guests. Using reusable fabric napkins daily also cuts down on paper.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Are they absorbent?", "answer": "Linen is naturally good at absorbing moisture and releasing it again quickly. That makes it a sensible fibre for napkins, which need to handle spills and damp hands. It also means they dry fast after washing.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Will they pill or go bobbly?", "answer": "Linen is a long fibre, so it is usually less prone to pilling than short-fibre fabrics. Wash at 40°C and keep them apart from rough items with zips or hooks.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Do they fray at the edges?", "answer": "These are finished napkins with hemmed edges, not raw-cut cloth. As with any fabric, rough handling or snagging can damage an edge, so wash them with care.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Can I use them as small cloths for other jobs?", "answer": "Plenty of people do. A square of washed linen works for covering a bread basket, lining a tray or wrapping a loaf. Just keep the ones you use for the table separate from any you repurpose for cleaning.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "How should I store them between uses?", "answer": "Fold or roll them loosely and keep them in a drawer or on a shelf away from damp. Linen does not need airtight storage. If they have been pressed, folding along the same lines each time keeps the creases tidy.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Do they work in a restaurant or café setting?", "answer": "Yes, the maker suggests them for restaurants, cafes and hotels as well as homes. The neutral beige suits most interiors. For heavy daily service you would want plenty of spares in rotation.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Is this a good gift?", "answer": "Table linen is a reliable gift for a housewarming, a wedding or a first proper dining table. It is useful, it is not tied to anyone's taste in colour, and four napkins feels like a complete present rather than a token.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "How do I fold them for a dinner party?", "answer": "A simple flat rectangle laid under the cutlery is clean and modern. A loose roll through a napkin ring looks relaxed. For something a bit more formal, a basic triangle fold on the plate takes seconds and looks considered.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Can I dye them a different colour?", "answer": "Linen takes dye well, but starting from beige limits your options to mid and deep shades. Home dyeing is always at your own risk and may affect the finish. Most people are better off buying the shade they want.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "What is the difference between these and cotton napkins?", "answer": "Linen is a strong, absorbent flax fibre with a drier, more textured feel. Cotton tends to feel smoother at first. These napkins are 100% linen with no cotton in the cloth.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Is the colour exactly the same in every napkin?", "answer": "All four are the same beige. Natural fibres can show very slight tonal variation, which is a characteristic of linen rather than a fault. In practice they read as a matched set on the table.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "Where are they made?", "answer": "The maker states the napkins are made in the EU.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "What if they are not right when they arrive?", "answer": "If the size, colour or feel is not what you expected, contact us and we will talk you through the returns process. Keep them unwashed and in their original packaging if you think you may want to send them back.", "source": "Stonewashed Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-napkins-set-of-4-beige/" }, { "question": "What size is this tablecloth?", "answer": "It measures 140 cm wide by 300 cm long, which is 1.4 m by 3 m. That is a long rectangular cut intended for extended dining tables. Measure your own tabletop before ordering so you know how much overhang you will get.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "What is the tablecloth made from?", "answer": "It is made from a blend of cotton and linen, as stated by the maker. The maker does not give the percentages of each fibre. It is a blend and not pure linen.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Is this pure linen?", "answer": "No. It is a cotton and linen blend. Pure linen behaves differently, creasing more sharply and feeling crisper, so it is worth being clear that this cloth is a mix of the two fibres.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "The ground is a pale beige with light green vine leaf embroidery down the centre and off-white tassels. The neutral base makes it easy to pair with white crockery, clear glass, timber boards and most napkin colours.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Is the leaf pattern printed or stitched?", "answer": "It is embroidery, as stated by the maker, so the leaf design is stitched into the fabric rather than printed on the surface. That gives it a slight raised texture.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "How many people will this cloth seat?", "answer": "The maker suggests the 140 x 300 cm size for a table seating twelve to fourteen, depending on chair spacing and how much overhang you leave. Always check against your own table length first.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Will it fit a 240 cm table?", "answer": "Yes, and you would have around 30 cm of overhang at each end, which looks generous rather than excessive. If you prefer a shorter drop, a cloth closer to your table length would suit better. Many people like the longer drop for formal meals.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on a table shorter than 300 cm?", "answer": "You can, as long as you are happy with a long drop at each end. Too much overhang can brush against knees at the head of the table. Measure first and decide how much fabric you want hanging.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Does it work on a round or oval table?", "answer": "It is cut rectangular, so it will not sit evenly on a round table. On a long oval table it can work, though the corners will hang lower than the sides. For round tables a dedicated round cloth is the better choice.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "How much overhang should a tablecloth have?", "answer": "For everyday dining, about 20 to 30 cm of drop on each side is comfortable. For a more formal setting, 30 to 40 cm looks fuller. Subtract your table length from 300 cm and divide by two to work out the end drop.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Is the tablecloth machine washable?", "answer": "Yes, the maker states it is machine washable and gives no temperature. A cool, gentle cycle with a mild detergent and similar colours is the cautious choice.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Will the embroidery survive washing?", "answer": "The maker states the cloth is machine washable. Wash cool and gently, and skip the bleach, which can affect the thread colour. Pressing on the reverse keeps the stitching sitting proud.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry it?", "answer": "The maker gives no drying instructions. Line drying in the shade is the cautious choice for both the fabric and the tassels, and it reduces creasing. Take it down while slightly damp if you plan to iron.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "How do I get the creases out?", "answer": "Press it while still slightly damp on a medium iron, working on the reverse over the embroidered area. A quick steam while the cloth is already on the table also works for light fold lines. Hanging it overnight after washing drops out a lot of creasing on its own.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Will it crease badly in use?", "answer": "Any cotton and linen fabric will relax and show some soft creasing during a meal. That is part of the look of natural fibre table linen rather than a fault. A press before guests arrive is usually all it needs.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "How do I handle a wine or food spill?", "answer": "Blot the spill rather than rubbing it, lifting as much liquid as you can with a clean cloth. Rinse the area with cool water as soon as the meal allows, then wash normally. Avoid hot water on protein or wine stains, as heat can set them.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Is it stain resistant or waterproof?", "answer": "No. The maker states no treatment of that kind, so treat it as an untreated cotton and linen cloth. Liquids will soak in if left, which is why prompt blotting matters.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Can I use it outdoors?", "answer": "Yes, the maker suggests it as a garden table cloth. Bring it in before dew or rain, since damp fabric left folded can mark. On a breezy day, tablecloth weights or clips will stop it lifting.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Will the tassels get in the way?", "answer": "The tassel trim runs around the edges and drapes over the table sides, well clear of place settings. It is a decorative finish rather than a functional one.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "How should I wash it to protect the tassel trim?", "answer": "Wash it on its own or with other soft items, away from zips, hooks and buttons that could catch the fringe. A gentle cycle reduces tangling. If a tassel does twist, it usually combs straight with your fingers once dry.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Is this suitable for everyday use?", "answer": "Yes. Because it is machine washable it suits regular family meals as well as occasions. Many people keep a second cloth so one can be in the wash while the other is on the table.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Can I use it as a console or sideboard cover?", "answer": "It works well folded lengthwise over a long console, buffet or sideboard. The tassel edge gives a finished look along the front. You can also fold it to size for a hall table.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Does it suit a buffet or trestle table?", "answer": "It does, and the long cut is one of the reasons to choose it. Trestle tables are often 180 cm or longer, and joined tables longer still. Check the combined length before you set up.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "What napkins and table settings suit it?", "answer": "Plain white or cream napkins keep the focus on the embroidery, while sage, olive or soft grey picks up the leaf colour. Natural timber boards, clear glass and simple ceramics all sit well with it. Avoid heavy patterns, which compete with the stitching.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Is the beige warm or cool toned?", "answer": "It is a pale, creamy beige. The maker also describes it as a white base with green leaf. Screen colours vary, so expect slight differences from the photographs.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Does it come in other sizes?", "answer": "This page is for the 140 x 300 cm rectangular cloth only, in beige with green leaf embroidery.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Where is the embroidery placed?", "answer": "The maker places the vine leaf embroidery in the centre of the cloth. In the photographs it runs down the middle like a runner, with sprays of light green leaves and small beige berries, and the rest of the cloth is plain.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "What are the tassels like?", "answer": "Small off-white tassels hang from a narrow braided trim around the edges of the cloth. The maker describes it as a tassel trim that drapes over the table edges.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "Does it make a good gift?", "answer": "It can, particularly for a housewarming, a wedding or anyone who hosts long dinners. Pair it with napkins or a set of candles for a complete gift.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right when it arrives?", "answer": "Keep the packaging, leave the cloth unwashed, and get in touch with our team as soon as you can. If the size is wrong for your table, or the colour is not what you pictured, we will walk you through the returns process for your country.", "source": "Embroidered Cotton Linen Tablecloth with Tassels, 140 x 300 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/linen-tablecloth-embroidered-leaves/" }, { "question": "What size is this tablecloth?", "answer": "It measures 140 x 220 cm, which is 1.4 metres wide by 2.2 metres long. That is an oval cut, not a rectangle with rounded corners. The maker sizes it for a 6 to 8 seater oval table.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "What is it made from?", "answer": "It is a blend of cotton and linen, as stated by the maker. The maker does not give the percentages. It is not pure linen.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Is this pure linen?", "answer": "No. It is a cotton and linen blend. If you specifically want 100% linen, this is not that product.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "Plain beige. It is a pale, soft neutral, which is why it sits so easily next to wooden furniture.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Does it have a pattern?", "answer": "No. This cloth is plain beige all over, with a tassel edge and no pattern or decoration on the surface.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "What is the tassel trim like?", "answer": "It is a row of small off-white tassels on a narrow braided border that runs around the edge of the cloth and hangs over the table rim. It follows the oval curve and gives the cloth a finished, slightly relaxed look.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Will it fit my oval table?", "answer": "Measure your tabletop length and width first. For an even drop all round, you want the cloth to be longer and wider than the table by roughly twice the overhang you want. The maker sizes the 140 x 220 cm cloth for a 6 to 8 seater oval table.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "How much overhang will I get?", "answer": "Subtract your tabletop dimensions from 140 x 220 cm and halve the result. For example, on a table 100 x 180 cm you would get about 20 cm of drop on each side. That is a comfortable everyday drop.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on a round table?", "answer": "You can, though it will hang much longer at two sides than the others because the cloth is oval. On a round table 100 cm across you would get about 20 cm of drop at the sides and about 60 cm at the ends. A round cloth would sit more evenly.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on a rectangular table?", "answer": "It will cover a rectangular table but the curved ends mean the corners of the table will show. Some people like that softened look, but if you want full corner coverage, choose a rectangular cloth instead.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Is it machine washable?", "answer": "Yes, the maker states it is machine washable and gives no temperature. A cool, gentle cycle with a mild detergent and similar colours is the cautious choice. Skip the bleach.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Will it shrink?", "answer": "Cotton and linen fabrics can tighten slightly on their first wash. Washing cool and avoiding high heat drying keeps any movement to a minimum.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry it?", "answer": "The maker gives no drying instructions. Line drying in the shade is the cautious choice. Taking it down while still slightly damp and smoothing it flat saves a lot of ironing.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Does it need ironing?", "answer": "A cotton linen blend will crease, that is part of the character. Press on a warm setting while the cloth is slightly damp for the crispest finish, or leave the soft creases if you prefer a relaxed table.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "How do I look after the tassels?", "answer": "Wash the cloth inside a laundry bag if you want to keep the strands from tangling. After washing, run your fingers through the fringe to straighten it before the cloth dries fully.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Is it stain resistant?", "answer": "No. The maker claims no stain-resistant finish for this cloth. Treat spills quickly by blotting rather than rubbing, then wash as normal.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Is it waterproof?", "answer": "No. It is a woven fabric cloth, so liquid will soak through to the table. Use coasters or a protective pad underneath if your table surface is sensitive.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Can I use it outdoors?", "answer": "Yes, the maker suggests it as a garden table cloth. Bring it in afterwards rather than leaving it out in rain or strong sun.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Will it slip off the table?", "answer": "It is a woven cloth with a tassel edge that hangs over the table rim. On a very smooth tabletop outdoors, a few tablecloth clips or weights are worth adding on a breezy day.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for everyday use?", "answer": "Yes. Because it is machine washable it works as everyday table linen rather than something kept for occasions. Many people keep one on the table permanently and a spare in the cupboard.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Does it work for dinner parties and Christmas?", "answer": "It does. A plain beige base suits seasonal styling, since you can change the look entirely with napkins, candles and a centrepiece.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on a console or sideboard?", "answer": "Yes, folded or draped it makes a good console table cover. The tassel edge looks especially nice hanging over the front of a sideboard.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "What dinnerware suits it?", "answer": "Almost anything. Beige is quiet enough to sit under white porcelain, stoneware, coloured glass or patterned china without competing with it.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Does it come in other sizes?", "answer": "This page is for the 140 x 220 cm oval cloth only, in plain beige.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Is the beige completely flat in colour?", "answer": "It is a plain beige with no pattern. Up close the weave shows a fine natural fleck, which gives the cloth a little texture rather than a flat, printed look.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "How many people does the maker size it for?", "answer": "The maker sizes the 140 x 220 cm oval cloth for a table seating six to eight.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Does it come with matching napkins?", "answer": "Napkins are not included with this cloth. Plain or natural-toned napkins pair well with it if you want a coordinated table.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "Does it make a good gift?", "answer": "It can. Table linen is a useful housewarming or wedding gift, and a plain beige oval cloth suits most homes. Check the recipient has an oval table of the right size first.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "How should I store it between uses?", "answer": "Fold it loosely and keep it somewhere dry and dark. Storing it over a padded hanger or rolled around a tube avoids deep fold lines if you want it crease-free when it comes out.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "What if the tablecloth is not right for my table?", "answer": "Check the measurements against your tabletop before unpacking fully. If the fit or the shade is not what you hoped for, contact us with your order number and we will talk you through the returns process for an unused item in its original packaging.", "source": "Oval Cotton Linen Tablecloth in Beige with Tassel Trim", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/oval-linen-tablecloth-beige/" }, { "question": "What exactly is in this set?", "answer": "You get four napkins, all the same. Each one is a 42 x 42 cm square in natural beige, made from 100% linen.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "How big is each napkin?", "answer": "Each napkin measures 42 x 42 cm. That is a standard dinner napkin size, large enough to cover a lap comfortably.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What is the fabric?", "answer": "The fabric is 100% linen, as stated by the maker, with no cotton or synthetic blend. Linen is spun from flax fibres, which is why it feels textured rather than smooth.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What colour are they?", "answer": "Natural beige. In the photographs it is a muted grey-beige, close to the colour of raw flax, rather than a bright white or a yellow beige.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Is there any pattern on them?", "answer": "No, the finish is solid. There is no print, stripe or border, just the natural texture of the linen weave.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Where are they made?", "answer": "The maker states they are made in the EU.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Will they feel stiff when they arrive?", "answer": "New linen usually has a bit of body to it. A wash relaxes the fibres, and linen generally softens further with washing.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "How do I wash them?", "answer": "The maker's care instruction is to machine wash at 40°C. Wash with similar colours and skip the fabric softener, because it coats the fibre and makes linen less absorbent.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry linen napkins?", "answer": "The maker's care instruction covers washing only, at 40°C. Line drying is the cautious choice. If you do tumble dry, use a low heat and take them out while slightly damp.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Do I need to iron them?", "answer": "Only if you want to. Iron while damp for a crisp table, or fold them as they are for the softer rustic linen napkins look.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Will they shrink?", "answer": "Linen can relax slightly in the first wash, which is normal for natural fibres. Washing at the stated 40°C rather than hotter keeps any change minimal.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Are they absorbent enough for a proper meal?", "answer": "Linen is one of the most absorbent natural fibres and it dries quickly too. That combination is what makes these useful washable cloth napkins for long dinners.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "How many people will one set serve?", "answer": "Four, one napkin each. If you regularly host six or eight, two sets is the easy answer and they will match.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Are these suitable for weddings or events?", "answer": "They can work well. Plain natural beige suits most colour schemes. For a larger table you would order several sets of four.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Can I use them every day?", "answer": "Yes. They are machine washable at 40°C, so they suit daily meals as well as occasions.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Will red wine ruin them?", "answer": "Treat spills quickly with cold water and a normal stain remover before the wash. It is sensible to expect some marking on a pale natural colour over time.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Can I bleach them?", "answer": "Avoid bleach. It weakens linen fibres and can leave uneven patches on a natural beige shade.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Do they fit in napkin rings?", "answer": "Yes. A 42 cm square rolls or folds neatly into a standard napkin ring.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What is the best way to fold them?", "answer": "A simple rectangle beside the plate is hard to beat for everyday meals. For a dressier table, fold into a square and drape it across the plate with one soft corner hanging down.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Do these work as part of a larger table linen set?", "answer": "They do. Natural beige is a neutral base, so it sits happily with white, cream, sage, charcoal or wood tones.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Are they good for a rustic or farmhouse table?", "answer": "That is exactly where they shine. The texture of pure linen against bare wood is the heart of the farmhouse table linen look.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Are they practical for family meals?", "answer": "Yes. They are plain cloth napkins and they are machine washable at 40°C, which handles the usual mess of family meals.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Are they hemmed?", "answer": "Yes. In the photographs each napkin has a stitched hem along its edges, and a small label is sewn into the hem at one corner.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Why is the colour called natural?", "answer": "The maker lists the colour as Natural and also describes it as natural beige. It is the muted grey-beige associated with undyed flax, with no pattern.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "How should I store them between uses?", "answer": "Fold them flat in a drawer or on a shelf, away from direct sunlight. Linen prefers to breathe, so avoid sealed plastic for long storage.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Will they wrinkle?", "answer": "Linen creases, and that is part of its character. If you want the crispest finish, iron while damp, otherwise embrace the relaxed texture.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Do they make a good gift?", "answer": "They can. A set of four natural linen napkins is a useful housewarming or wedding present, and the neutral colour suits most dining rooms.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Can I dye them a different colour?", "answer": "Linen takes dye well, but home dyeing results vary and it is at your own risk. Most people keep them as they are for their neutral flexibility.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "Do both sides of the napkin look the same?", "answer": "Yes. The cloth is a solid natural linen with no print, so the two faces look alike. The hem is turned to one side.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What if they are not right for my table?", "answer": "If the colour or size does not suit once you see them in your own room, contact us and we will walk you through the returns process. Keep them unused and in their original packaging so the return is straightforward.", "source": "Rustic Pure Linen Napkins, Set of 4, Natural Beige", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/rustic-linen-napkins-set-of-4/" }, { "question": "What exactly do I get in this pack?", "answer": "You get two bib aprons in one pack. One has a blue stripe and the other has a coffee stripe. Both share the same design, with two front pockets and an adjustable neck strap.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "What is the apron made from?", "answer": "The maker states the fabric is cotton and linen, with no percentages given. That makes it a cotton and linen blend and not pure linen. The maker describes it as soft to touch and lightweight.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Is this real linen?", "answer": "It is not pure linen. The maker describes it as cotton and linen without stating the ratio, so it should be treated as a blend. If you need a 100% linen fabric, this is not the right product.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Are the two aprons the same size?", "answer": "Yes, both aprons share the same cut and the same adjustable neck strap. Only the stripe colour differs between them.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Will one size fit most adults?", "answer": "The maker says the adjustable neck strap can be quickly altered to fit most sizes. The strap lets the bib sit higher or lower, and the waist ties cinch tighter or looser. It is listed as a unisex item rather than in separate sizes.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "How many pockets does each apron have?", "answer": "Each apron has two pockets on the front. The maker suggests them for utensils, recipes, a small towel and a smartphone.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Can I keep my phone in the pocket safely?", "answer": "The maker lists a smartphone among the things the front pockets will hold. Because the pockets are open at the top, bend carefully when leaning over a counter or a low oven.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Is this a good apron for cooking every day?", "answer": "Yes, the maker lists cooking, baking and cleaning among its uses. The lightweight fabric and simple shape make it easy to put on and take off between tasks, which is what keeps an apron out of the drawer.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Does it work for baking as well?", "answer": "It does. The bib covers the chest and stomach, which is where most baking mess ends up, and the two pockets take a timer or a scraper.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Can I use it for barbecuing?", "answer": "It suits general barbecue work such as prepping, turning food and serving. Keep in mind that cotton and linen are not flame resistant, so stay a sensible distance from open flame and hot coals.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for crafts, painting or gardening?", "answer": "Yes, the maker lists painting and garden use. The bib protects clothing and the pockets hold brushes, clips, seed packets or small hand tools. Be aware that paint and some garden marks may not wash out fully.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Will it work in a cafe or small restaurant?", "answer": "The maker lists restaurants and coffee houses among its uses. Having two aprons means a clean one is ready while the other is in the wash. For busy commercial service you may want several packs so rotation is easy.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Is it unisex?", "answer": "Yes, the maker lists it as unisex. The adjustable strap and tie waist make it practical for different wearers.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Can children wear it?", "answer": "These are adult aprons, so on a child the bib will sit low and the ties will be long. You can shorten the neck strap and wrap the ties twice, which helps, but it will still be oversized. For regular use with younger cooks, a child specific apron is a better fit.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "How do I wash it?", "answer": "Machine wash cold on a gentle cycle with similar colours. Do not tumble dry. Line dry or dry flat, then use a low iron if you want a smoother finish.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Why can I not tumble dry it?", "answer": "The maker's care instructions say do not tumble dry. Line dry or dry flat instead, which also keeps the shape and the stripes looking tidy.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Should I wash it before the first use?", "answer": "A first cold wash is a good habit with any new textile. It removes packing creases and any residue from manufacturing. Dry flat or on a line afterwards.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Will the stripes fade?", "answer": "Washing cold and keeping the aprons out of direct sunlight when drying helps the colours hold. Avoid bleach, which can leave pale patches on striped fabric. Normal domestic washing should not cause sudden fading.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "How do I get oil stains out?", "answer": "Treat oil marks while they are still fresh by dabbing a little washing up liquid onto the spot and working it in gently. Leave it a few minutes, then run a normal cold wash. Repeat before drying if a shadow remains, because heat sets stains.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Can I iron the aprons?", "answer": "Yes, with a low iron setting. Iron while the fabric is slightly damp for the smoothest result. Avoid pressing hard over the pocket seams.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "How should I store them?", "answer": "Keep them in a cool, dry place, folded in a drawer or hung on a hook near the kitchen. Damp storage encourages mustiness in cotton blends. A hook close to where you cook makes them far more likely to get used.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "How much do they weigh?", "answer": "The maker lists the packed weight as 240 g for the pack of two. The maker describes the fabric as lightweight.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "What are the packed dimensions?", "answer": "The maker lists the folded pack as 15 x 10 x 5 cm. That is the packaged size, not the size of the apron when worn.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Where is it made?", "answer": "The maker lists the country of origin as China.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Does it come in other colours?", "answer": "This pack is supplied as one blue stripe and one coffee stripe, each with a cream neck strap.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Is this a good gift?", "answer": "It works well as a practical gift for someone who cooks, bakes or has just moved into a new place. Because there are two aprons, it also suits couples or a parent and older child who cook together. Pairing it with a tea towel or a wooden spoon makes it feel more considered.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Can I give one apron away and keep the other?", "answer": "Yes, and people often do. Two different stripes in one pack makes it easy to split between a gift and your own kitchen. It also means you are not giving away a matching set by accident.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "Does it protect trousers as well as a top?", "answer": "The bib covers the chest and torso, and the lower panel covers the front of the thighs. Side splashes and the backs of your legs are not covered. For very messy jobs, add a towel over the shoulder.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "How do I choose between this and a heavier work apron?", "answer": "Go lighter if most of your cooking is home meals, baking and tidying, because comfort matters more than armour. Choose a heavy canvas or waxed apron if you are dealing with sparks, sharp tools or constant soaking. Many people own one of each.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "What if the apron is not right for me?", "answer": "Check the pack contents and care details before use, and keep the packaging until you are sure. If the fit or fabric is not what you expected, contact our support team and they will talk you through the returns process for your country.", "source": "Striped Cotton Linen Apron 2 Pack with Pockets", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/striped-linen-apron-2-pack/" }, { "question": "What is this throw actually made from?", "answer": "It is made from 100% baby alpaca wool, made in Peru as stated by the maker. No acrylic, sheep wool or cotton is named in the composition. Baby alpaca is a fine grade of the fleece, selected for softness, and does not refer to the age of the animal.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "How big is the blanket?", "answer": "It measures 180 x 130 cm, and that figure includes the fringe. That is a comfortable single-person size for a sofa or armchair. Across a double bed it works as a foot-of-bed throw rather than full coverage.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "How heavy is it?", "answer": "The maker gives the weight as about 550 g. For a blanket of this size that is light, which is one of the main reasons people choose alpaca over heavier wool.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Will it be warm enough if it is that light?", "answer": "Alpaca fibre is known for trapping air, which slows heat loss. That is how a throw of about 550 g can still feel properly warm. It is a good choice for anyone who wants a lightweight wool throw and not something weighty.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Does it feel scratchy?", "answer": "Baby alpaca is the fine end of the fleece, so the individual fibres are slimmer and bend more easily against skin. That generally reads as smooth rather than prickly. People who find standard wool itchy often get on well with it.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "What is lanolin and why does it matter?", "answer": "Lanolin is the natural wool grease that coats sheep fleece, and it gives raw wool its particular smell. The maker states that baby alpaca wool is free from lanolin.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Is the weave plain or patterned?", "answer": "Plain. The photographs show a fine, even weave in a single beige with a fringe at each short end. A small maker's tag is sewn near one corner.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "It is a plain beige, listed by the maker as Col04 Beige Uni. There is no pattern, stripe or contrast border. The fringe is in the same beige as the body of the throw.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Will beige match my room?", "answer": "Beige is a warm neutral, so it sits comfortably with grey, charcoal, navy, oak, leather and most white or off-white walls. If you redecorate often, a plain neutral is the easy pick.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on a bed?", "answer": "Yes. At 180 x 130 cm it makes a good foot-of-bed throw across a double or king, laid widthways. On a single bed it can act as a top layer over the duvet. It is not sized to be a full bedspread for a double.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Is it good for the sofa?", "answer": "It is one of the more popular uses. The size covers an adult from shoulders to feet, and the light weight means it drapes over the arm of the sofa neatly when not in use.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Can I take it travelling?", "answer": "Yes, and the weight is the reason. At around 550 g it folds small and does not take up much of your luggage allowance. It suits long flights and train journeys.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Is it warm enough for outdoor use?", "answer": "It works well as a lap blanket for a terrace, a garden bench or a sporting fixture in cool weather. It is not waterproof and should not be left out in rain or damp grass. Bring it in and air it afterwards.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "How should I wash it?", "answer": "Most of the time you should not. Air it outdoors or near an open window. For spills, blot with cool water and a little wool-safe detergent, and do not rub.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Can I machine wash it?", "answer": "Follow the maker's care label, which is the final word on this item. In general, fine alpaca is safer hand washed in cool water or given to a wool-trained dry cleaner. Hot water and agitation are what cause shrinking and felting.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Can I tumble dry it?", "answer": "No. Heat and tumbling will felt and shrink alpaca fibre, and the damage cannot be reversed. Dry it flat on a towel, away from radiators and direct sun, reshaping it gently while it is damp.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Can I iron it?", "answer": "Generally you will not need to, as alpaca drops creases when hung or aired. If you must press it, use a cool setting with a pressing cloth between the iron and the fibre. Never press directly onto the fringe.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "How do I look after the fringe?", "answer": "Straighten it with your fingers each time you fold the throw. Avoid pulling at loose strands, as that can work the twist loose. Comb through gently with your fingers and not a brush.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Will it shed or pill?", "answer": "Any natural fibre throw releases a few loose fibres in the first weeks of use, and that settles down. Light pilling can appear in areas of heavy rub, such as where it meets a sofa arm. A fabric comb lifts pills off without harming the weave.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "How should I store it in summer?", "answer": "Fold it loosely and keep it in a breathable cotton bag, not a sealed plastic one, because trapped moisture causes problems. Store somewhere dry and dark. A cedar block or lavender sachet nearby discourages moths.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Do moths go for alpaca?", "answer": "Moths are drawn to animal fibres in general, so sensible storage matters. Keep the throw clean, aired and well stored. Regular use helps too, since moths prefer fabric that is left undisturbed.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable for a baby or child's room?", "answer": "This is an adult-sized throw. The maker states it holds Oeko-Tex Standard 100 certification in product class 1, the class that covers baby products. Never leave loose blankets in a cot with a sleeping infant, in line with standard safe sleep advice.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Can I use it as a wrap or shawl?", "answer": "Yes, the size and weight lend themselves to it. Folded in half lengthways it sits well across the shoulders. Many people treat it as both a blanket and a travel wrap.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Does it have a smell?", "answer": "Lanolin is what gives sheep wool its characteristic scent, and the maker states baby alpaca is free from it. A faint natural fibre smell on unpacking is normal. Hanging the throw in fresh air for a day usually clears it.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "How does it compare with a cashmere throw?", "answer": "Both are fine, soft and light. Cashmere is usually the softer of the two.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "How does it compare with a sheep wool blanket?", "answer": "A sheep wool blanket of the same size will usually be noticeably heavier and contains lanolin. This throw weighs about 550 g and the maker states it is free from lanolin. If weight is your concern, alpaca is the easier choice.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Does it make a good gift?", "answer": "It is a well-judged present for a new home, a milestone birthday or a retirement. The neutral beige suits almost any interior, which removes the guesswork.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Does it carry any certification?", "answer": "The maker states the throw holds Oeko-Tex Standard 100 certification, in product class 1 for baby products, and gives the reference Hohenstein 16.0.83819.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "Can I return it if I change my mind?", "answer": "Yes. Send it back unused and in its original packaging within the returns window shown on our returns page, and we will arrange a refund. Keep the tags and wrapping until you are sure you are keeping it.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right when it arrives?", "answer": "Get in touch and tell us what the problem is, with a photo if it relates to the item itself. If the throw is faulty or not as described, we will put it right. If it is simply not the shade or the size you pictured, the standard return applies and we will talk you through it.", "source": "Baby Alpaca Throw Blanket 130 x 180 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/baby-alpaca-throw-blanket-130-x-180/" }, { "question": "What exactly is this blanket made from?", "answer": "It is 25% merino wool, 72% polyester and 3% nylon, as stated by the maker. That makes it a merino blend, not pure merino wool. The maker states the merino wool is Australian.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is this pure merino wool?", "answer": "No, and we would rather be clear about that. Only a quarter of the fibre content is merino wool, with the rest polyester and nylon. If you specifically want a 100% wool throw, this is not that product.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "How big is it?", "answer": "The blanket measures 160 x 200 cm. That covers a standard two-seater sofa, lies comfortably across the foot of a double bed, or wraps two people sitting together outdoors.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Will it fit a double bed as a bedspread?", "answer": "It works well as a layer over a double bed rather than as a full bedspread that reaches the floor. At 160 x 200 cm it will cover the sleeping surface and tuck in a little at the sides. On a king size bed it is better used across the foot.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "It is pumpkin orange, a warm rustic shade. The photographs show a dark brown bound edge around it. Screens vary, so expect a slight difference between the photographs and the blanket in your own light.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is it warm enough for winter?", "answer": "The maker says the blanket is suited to cold days. For deep winter camping most people layer a blanket with a sleeping bag. As a sofa or car blanket in winter it does the job well.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does it still work when the weather is damp?", "answer": "The maker says the blanket provides pleasant warmth even in damp weather. That makes it a sensible choice for the sidelines, boats or early morning fishing.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I machine wash it?", "answer": "Yes, the maker states it is machine washable. We suggest a cool, gentle or wool cycle with a mild detergent suitable for wool blends. Reshape it while damp and dry it flat or over a line, away from radiators and direct sun.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can it go in the tumble dryer?", "answer": "We would not recommend it. Heat is what shrinks and felts wool fibres, so line drying or drying flat is far safer. If you have no choice, use the coolest air setting and take it out while slightly damp.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Should I use fabric softener?", "answer": "No. Softener coats wool fibres and gradually dulls their loft and warmth. A small amount of wool-safe detergent is all it needs.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does it smell of wool?", "answer": "The maker states it is washed several times during production to give a fresh, odour-free feel. Wool blends can pick up a faint scent if stored damp, so air it on a line now and then.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Will it make me itch?", "answer": "Merino fibre is finer than coarse wools, so it tends to feel softer against skin, and here it is blended with polyester and nylon. If wool does not agree with your skin, keep a layer of clothing between you and the blanket.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is it good for camping?", "answer": "The maker describes it as a camping blanket. It gives warmth in damp air, folds into a bag, keeps its shape after folding and can be washed at home when it comes back covered in grass and woodsmoke.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I use it as a picnic blanket on grass?", "answer": "Yes, though it is a soft throw rather than a waterproof-backed rug. On wet ground put a groundsheet or tarp underneath. On dry grass it makes a practical picnic blanket because it washes easily.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does it work as a car blanket?", "answer": "It does, and that is one of the most common uses for a throw this size. Keep it folded in the boot for breakdowns, cold starts, muddy dogs or unexpected roadside stops.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is it a good stadium or match-day blanket?", "answer": "Yes. The size lets two people share it on a bench seat, and the maker names football games among its uses. It also looks fine at home afterwards.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "How thick is it?", "answer": "The maker describes it as an ultra-thick outdoor blanket that is soft, lightweight and fluffy.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does it have a bound edge?", "answer": "Yes. The photographs show a dark brown binding stitched around all four edges, which frames the pumpkin orange.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Will it crease if I keep it folded?", "answer": "The maker says the blanket has good reset properties and remains dimensionally stable even after folding. A shake out and a few minutes hanging is usually enough to settle any fold lines.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on a sofa every day?", "answer": "That is exactly what it suits. As a merino blend sofa blanket it drapes over the back or arm of a sofa, and the pumpkin colour hides daily marks better than cream or pale grey.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on furniture that pets sit on?", "answer": "Many people use a throw like this to protect upholstery from pet hair. It washes at home, which is the main thing. A lint roller will shift most hair before washing.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does the colour run in the wash?", "answer": "Deep shades can release a little dye on their first wash. Wash it separately the first time, use cool water and avoid leaving it sitting wet in the machine.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I iron it?", "answer": "Only on a cool setting, and usually it is unnecessary. Reshaping while damp takes care of most creasing. High heat risks flattening the loft.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "How should I store it in summer?", "answer": "Wash or air it first, make sure it is completely dry, then store it folded in a breathable cotton bag rather than sealed plastic. Dry, dark and airy is the rule for anything with wool in it.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does it pill?", "answer": "Any brushed blend can lift a few surface fibres early on, usually in high-friction spots. A gentle pass with a fabric comb removes them and it generally settles down with use.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Would it make a good gift?", "answer": "A large throw is an easy gift because it does not need a size or a measurement from the recipient. The rustic orange suits new homes, campers, caravanners and anyone who feels the cold on the sofa.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "How does it compare to a fleece blanket?", "answer": "Fleece is lighter and cheaper. This blanket has 25% merino wool content, while the synthetic fibres keep it easy to wash.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I use it as a bedspread layer in a guest room?", "answer": "Yes. Laid across a bed it adds a warm top layer and a bit of colour, and it is simple to pull off and wash between guests. That dual role as a bedspread and throw is part of why this size is so useful.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "Where does the merino wool come from?", "answer": "The maker states the blanket is made with Australian merino wool. The merino makes up 25% of the fibre content, with polyester and nylon making up the rest.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me when it arrives?", "answer": "Keep the packaging, check the size and shade in your own room first, and get in touch with our team if it is not what you expected. We will talk you through a return or an exchange for something that suits your space better. Unwashed and unused items are the easiest to sort out.", "source": "Merino Blend Blanket 160 x 200 cm in Pumpkin", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-blanket-160-x-200/" }, { "question": "What is this blanket made from?", "answer": "It is woven from 100% fine merino wool, as stated by the maker. No synthetic fibre is named in the composition.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How big is the blanket?", "answer": "It measures 140 x 200 cm, and that figure includes the fringe.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "It is a grey and white check. The photographs show large blocks of mid grey, pale grey and white crossed by fine white lines, with a fringe in the same colours. The pattern is woven in, not printed.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Will it fit a single bed?", "answer": "Yes. At 140 x 200 cm it covers a standard single mattress with a little to tuck or overhang, which makes it a sensible wool blanket for a single bed.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on a double bed?", "answer": "You can, but it will not cover a double from side to side. Most people lay it across the foot of a double or king as a top layer and extra warmth over the legs.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is merino wool itchy?", "answer": "Merino fibres are much finer than standard wool, so they flex against the skin instead of pressing into it. The maker describes this blanket as skin friendly. Skin differs from person to person, so some people still prefer a layer underneath.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is it heavy?", "answer": "The maker describes it as lightweight. Merino gives warmth without the bulk you get from coarse wool, so it is easy to carry from room to room.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How warm is it compared with a fleece throw?", "answer": "Fleece can feel warm quickly. This is a 100% merino wool blanket, and we do not give a warmth rating for it, so we cannot compare the two directly.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I use it in spring and autumn too?", "answer": "Yes. The maker describes it as lightweight, so many people use it from a cool spring morning to a cold winter night.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Where is it made?", "answer": "The maker states it is made in the EU.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does it have a fringe?", "answer": "Yes. The photographs show a twisted fringe along both short ends, in grey and white to match the check. The fringe is included in the 140 x 200 cm size.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is this a bedspread or a throw?", "answer": "It sits between the two. The maker gives the style as a duvet blanket, so it works as a top layer on a bed or as a throw over a sofa or chair.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I wash it in a machine?", "answer": "Follow the care label on the blanket itself. Many fine wool blankets are not suited to machine washing, so spot cleaning and airing are usually the safest routine.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How do I clean a small spill?", "answer": "Blot it straight away with a dry cloth, then dab with cool water and a small amount of wool-safe detergent. Work from the outside of the mark inwards and avoid rubbing, which can felt the surface.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does it need dry cleaning?", "answer": "If the care label advises dry cleaning, use a cleaner who handles wool regularly. Day to day, airing is usually enough to keep it fresh.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How should I dry it?", "answer": "Dry it flat, away from radiators and direct sun. Hanging a wet wool blanket can stretch it out of shape, and heat can shrink or harden the fibres.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How do I freshen it between cleans?", "answer": "Air it. Hanging the blanket outside for a few hours on a dry day, or by an open window, usually does more than a wash would.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Will it shed or pill?", "answer": "New wool can shed a few loose fibres in the first weeks, which settles with use. Gentle brushing in one direction and avoiding rough surfaces will reduce pilling on any lightweight wool blanket.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How do I look after the fringe?", "answer": "Comb it straight with your fingers after use and keep it clear of vacuum heads and door hinges. If a strand works loose, trim it rather than pulling it.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How should I store it in summer?", "answer": "Clean it first, then fold it with air around it in a breathable cotton bag or a drawer. Avoid sealed plastic, which traps moisture, and add a cedar block if moths are a concern in your home.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Are moths a problem with wool?", "answer": "Moths are attracted to natural fibres, especially if stored dirty and undisturbed. Regular use, occasional airing and clean storage are the main defence for any natural fibre blanket.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is it good for a reading chair?", "answer": "Very good. At 140 x 200 cm it wraps fully around an adult in a chair, and the fringed edge looks right draped over an arm when it is not in use.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I take it outdoors?", "answer": "Yes, it works as a wool picnic blanket or a layer at an evening match, though you may want a waterproof sheet underneath on wet grass.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does the check pattern suit modern rooms?", "answer": "Grey and white is about as neutral as a check gets. It works with pale linen, dark leather and painted wood alike, which is why a checked wool blanket is a long-term buy rather than a seasonal one.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is it suitable as a gift?", "answer": "It is a straightforward gift for a new home, a wedding or a winter birthday. Wool reads as considered without needing to know anyone's taste in colour precisely.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Will it work for someone who sleeps hot?", "answer": "We do not make a breathability claim for this blanket. The maker describes it as lightweight, so it is easy to use over the top of your bedding and push off when you get warm.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can children use it?", "answer": "It is a household blanket rather than infant bedding. For young children, follow normal safe sleep guidance and use it as a sofa or play-time layer instead of in a cot.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "What makes merino different from ordinary wool?", "answer": "Merino comes from a breed of sheep with a notably fine fleece. Finer fibres mean a softer handle, which is why merino is used in next-to-skin knitwear.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How long should a blanket like this last?", "answer": "That depends on how it is used and cared for, and we do not give a lifespan for it. Gentle cleaning and sensible storage matter more than anything else.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right when it arrives?", "answer": "Keep the packaging and get in touch with us before using or washing it. We will talk you through the return or exchange, and if the size or shade is not what you pictured we can suggest a better fit from the wool throws range.", "source": "Merino Wool Check Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/merino-wool-check-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "What is this blanket made from?", "answer": "It is woven from 100% pure New Zealand wool, as stated by the maker. No synthetic fibre is named in the composition.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How big is it?", "answer": "It measures 140 x 200 cm, and that figure includes the fringe at each end. That makes it a good fit across a two-seater sofa, over an armchair, or laid at the foot of a double bed.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "What colour is it?", "answer": "The maker names the colour Red Brown. The photographs show a deep red cloth flecked with brown, finished with a brown fringe. It sits comfortably with greys, navies, creams and natural wood.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is it patterned or plain?", "answer": "The photographs show a plain weave with a flecked, marl look, not a bold pattern. The contrast comes from the brown fringe against the red.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does it have a fringe?", "answer": "Yes, it is finished with a brown fringe at each end, and the 140 x 200 cm measurement is taken including the fringe. The fringe gives the throw a softer, more relaxed edge than a stitched hem.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is New Zealand wool different from other wool?", "answer": "New Zealand wool is widely used for blankets and throws because of its handle and loft. The maker states this blanket is 100% New Zealand wool and describes it as soft and warm.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Will it feel scratchy?", "answer": "Wool has more texture than fleece or cotton, so it has a natural handle, not a slippery one. Most people use a throw like this over clothing or on top of bedding, where texture is part of the appeal. If you are unsure, hold it against your forearm first.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I use it on a bed?", "answer": "Yes. At 140 x 200 cm it works well laid across the bottom of a double bed as an extra layer, or used on its own over a single bed. It is handy in spring and autumn, when a full winter duvet feels like too much.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is it warm enough for winter?", "answer": "This is a thick woven throw rather than a thin decorative one. Used on a sofa in winter it adds a real layer of warmth. On a bed, most people use it on top of existing bedding rather than instead of it.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I use it in summer?", "answer": "Yes, as a light layer on cool summer evenings. On a warm night it will likely be too much.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is this suitable as a travel blanket?", "answer": "It works well for car journeys, trains and long flights where you want your own layer. At this size it is substantial, so it is more of a proper blanket than a pocket-sized wrap, but it folds down reasonably for a bag.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I use it as a knee blanket?", "answer": "Yes, the maker names knee and travel use. Folded in half or in quarters it suits reading in a chair or sitting outside on a cool evening.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Will it fit a three-seater sofa?", "answer": "It will cover a good portion of a three-seater, and it comfortably covers two people sitting together. For full coverage of a large three-seater you may prefer two throws, or to use this one draped over the back and one arm.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How should I wash it?", "answer": "The maker recommends dry cleaning. If you would rather handle it yourself, hand wash in cool water or use a machine wool programme at a low temperature with a wool-safe detergent. Avoid hot water and avoid regular biological powders.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can it go in the tumble dryer?", "answer": "No. Tumble drying wool risks shrinking and felting the fibres, which cannot be undone. Press out excess water gently, then dry it flat away from direct heat and sunlight.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I iron it?", "answer": "Wool rarely needs ironing, and a woven throw like this usually settles out on its own. If you must, use the lowest wool setting with a pressing cloth, and keep the iron moving rather than resting it in one spot.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How often should I wash it?", "answer": "Far less often than you think. Airing the blanket outdoors on a dry day usually freshens it. Spot clean small marks straight away and save a full clean for once or twice a year.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "What happens if I spill something on it?", "answer": "Blot immediately with a clean cloth rather than rubbing, working from the outside of the spill inwards. Cool water handles most fresh spills. For anything oily or stubborn, a dry cleaner is the safer route.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Will it shed or pill?", "answer": "New wool products can release a few loose fibres in the first weeks of use, which is normal and settles down. A gentle shake outdoors and light brushing keeps the surface tidy.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "What colour is the fringe?", "answer": "Brown. The photographs show a brown fringe along both short ends, which picks up the brown flecks in the red cloth.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is it machine washable?", "answer": "It can be washed on a wool programme at a low temperature, but dry cleaning is the recommended method. If you do machine wash it, use a wool detergent, skip the spin or set it as low as possible, and dry flat.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does wool smell when it gets damp?", "answer": "Wool can take on a faint natural scent when damp, which fades as it dries. Dry it flat with good air circulation so the scent does not linger.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Do I need to protect it from moths?", "answer": "Wool is a natural fibre, so like any wool item it should be stored properly when not in use. Clean it before storing, keep it in a breathable cotton bag and not plastic, and add a cedar block or lavender sachet.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "How do I store it in summer?", "answer": "Air it, make sure it is completely dry, fold it loosely and store it in a breathable bag somewhere cool and dark. Avoid vacuum bags, which crush the loft out of wool over a long period.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Does it work as a gift?", "answer": "It does. A pure wool throw is one of the easier gift choices because it is useful as well as decorative, the warm red suits most homes, and it is not sized to a person. It is a common housewarming and winter gift.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Where is it made?", "answer": "The maker states it is made in the EU, from 100% New Zealand wool.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Is it thick or thin?", "answer": "The maker describes it as a soft, thick wool throw. It is a proper blanket weight, not a thin decorative layer.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Can I use it outdoors?", "answer": "Yes, for picnics, garden evenings and sports sidelines it works well. Shake it out well afterwards and let it dry fully before folding it away.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "Will pets damage it?", "answer": "Claws can snag the weave and the fringe is tempting to chew. If you have an enthusiastic cat or dog you may prefer to keep it on the back of the sofa and off the seat.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" }, { "question": "What if it is not right for me?", "answer": "If the size, colour or handle is not what you hoped for, contact us and we will talk you through the returns process. Keep it unused and in its original packaging where possible, and we will sort out the next step with you.", "source": "New Zealand Wool Blanket 140 x 200 cm", "url": "https://quietluxury.london/new-zealand-wool-blanket-140-x-200/" } ] }